WO2022082513A1 - 一种路由方法及装置 - Google Patents

一种路由方法及装置 Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2022082513A1
WO2022082513A1 PCT/CN2020/122531 CN2020122531W WO2022082513A1 WO 2022082513 A1 WO2022082513 A1 WO 2022082513A1 CN 2020122531 W CN2020122531 W CN 2020122531W WO 2022082513 A1 WO2022082513 A1 WO 2022082513A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
data packet
indication information
routing
target
identifier
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/CN2020/122531
Other languages
English (en)
French (fr)
Inventor
彭文杰
王君
史玉龙
Original Assignee
华为技术有限公司
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by 华为技术有限公司 filed Critical 华为技术有限公司
Priority to PCT/CN2020/122531 priority Critical patent/WO2022082513A1/zh
Priority to CN202080106170.1A priority patent/CN116325834A/zh
Priority to EP20958096.8A priority patent/EP4224900A4/en
Publication of WO2022082513A1 publication Critical patent/WO2022082513A1/zh
Priority to US18/303,030 priority patent/US20230262577A1/en

Links

Images

Classifications

    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W8/00—Network data management
    • H04W8/26—Network addressing or numbering for mobility support
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W40/00—Communication routing or communication path finding
    • H04W40/02—Communication route or path selection, e.g. power-based or shortest path routing
    • H04W40/22—Communication route or path selection, e.g. power-based or shortest path routing using selective relaying for reaching a BTS [Base Transceiver Station] or an access point
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W88/00—Devices specially adapted for wireless communication networks, e.g. terminals, base stations or access point devices
    • H04W88/02—Terminal devices
    • H04W88/04—Terminal devices adapted for relaying to or from another terminal or user
    • H—ELECTRICITY
    • H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04W—WIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W92/00—Interfaces specially adapted for wireless communication networks
    • H04W92/16—Interfaces between hierarchically similar devices
    • H04W92/18—Interfaces between hierarchically similar devices between terminal devices

Definitions

  • the present application relates to the field of communication technologies, and in particular, to a routing method and device.
  • the UE-to-network relay (U2N) technology is a technology that can effectively improve cell coverage.
  • the U2N system includes access network (AN) equipment and two types of terminal equipment: relay UE (relay UE) and remote UE (remote UE).
  • the relay UE can help the remote UE to access the AN device to obtain the service. For example, in the downlink direction, the relay UE can obtain the downlink data of the remote UE from the AN device, and forward the downlink data to the remote UE; in the uplink direction, after obtaining the uplink data of the remote UE, the relay UE can The upstream data is forwarded to the AN device.
  • the relay UE can provide the relay service for each remote UE.
  • the UE allocates a local ID (local ID).
  • the local identifier can uniquely identify a remote UE within the range of the relay UE.
  • the UE-to-network relay system can add the local identifier of the remote UE to the data packet to be transmitted to realize the routing between the AN device and the remote UE.
  • the AN device can add the local identifier of the target remote UE to the data packet that needs to be sent to the target remote UE.
  • the relay UE can The local identifier of the end UE determines that the destination device of the data packet is the target remote UE, so that the data packet is sent to the target remote UE.
  • the present application provides a routing method and device, which can be applied to a multi-hop communication scenario, but can also be applied to other scenarios.
  • the method and apparatus are used to implement routing between an AN device and a remote UE in a multi-hop communication scenario.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a routing method, which is applied to a first relay terminal.
  • the method may be executed by the first relay terminal, or executed by components such as a chip, a processor, or a chip system in the first relay terminal.
  • the following method is performed by the first relay terminal as an example, and the method is described in detail. The method has the following steps:
  • the first relay terminal After receiving the first data packet, the first relay terminal obtains first routing indication information and a target device identifier of the first data packet, where the first routing indication information is used to indicate the transmission of the first data packet routing; the target device indicated by the target device identifier is the destination device or source device of the first data packet; the first relay terminal is based on the first routing indication information, or according to the first routing indication information and the target device identifier to determine the first device; the first relay terminal transmits a second data packet to the first device, wherein the data carried in the second data packet is the same as the first data packet Bearing data is the same.
  • the first relay terminal can determine the transmission object according to the received first routing indication information of the first data packet and in combination with the target device identifier of the first data packet, so as to convert the data in the first data packet into Data is transferred to this transfer object.
  • this method can guide the routing transmission of the data packet through the routing indication information, or the routing indication information and the target device identifier, so as to ensure the routing between the AN device and the remote UE in the multi-hop communication scenario.
  • the first relay terminal may acquire the first routing indication information and the target device identifier in the following manner:
  • Mode 1 the first data packet has a first protocol layer header, and the first protocol layer header includes the first routing indication information and the target device identifier; from the first protocol of the first data packet Obtaining the first routing indication information and the target device identifier from the layer header;
  • Manner 2 In the case where the first data packet is received from the first remote terminal, the first data packet does not have a first protocol layer header; it is determined that the first routing indication information is the stored first routing indication information corresponding to the remote terminal, and determining that the target device identifier is the device identifier of the first remote terminal;
  • Manner 3 In the case of receiving the first data packet from the first remote terminal, the first data packet has a first protocol layer, and the first protocol layer header does not include the first routing indication information and the target device identification; determine that the first routing indication information is the stored routing indication information corresponding to the first remote terminal, and determine that the target device identification is the device identification of the first remote terminal.
  • the first relay terminal when the first data packet has the first protocol layer header, the first relay terminal can directly obtain the first routing indication information and the target device identifier in the first protocol layer header of the first data packet ;
  • the first relay terminal may Determine the first routing indication information and the target device identifier according to the first remote terminal.
  • the first relay terminal can acquire the first routing indication information and the target device identifier in various situations and scenarios.
  • the first relay terminal may also obtain route indication information corresponding to the first remote terminal from an access network device; wherein the route indication information corresponding to the first remote terminal It is the dedicated route indication information of the first remote terminal, or the default route indication information. In this way, when the first relay terminal receives the data packet of the first remote terminal, it can obtain the routing indication information of the data packet.
  • the routing indication information corresponding to the first remote terminal includes a plurality of routing indication information corresponding to different bearers; in this case, the first relay terminal can use the following Step, determine that the first routing indication information is the routing indication information corresponding to the first remote terminal:
  • the communication system can allocate multiple routing indication information to the first remote terminal with the bearer as the granularity; and determine the first routing indication information according to the bearer used for transmitting the first data packet of the first remote terminal.
  • the first routing indication information includes a destination address; the first data packet has a first protocol layer header; in this case, the first relay terminal may determine by the following methods The first device:
  • Manner 1 when the destination address is different from the address of the first relay terminal, determine the address of the next hop node corresponding to the first routing indication information; determine that the first device is the next hop node the next hop node indicated by the address;
  • Mode 2 when the destination address is the same as the address of the first relay terminal, determine that the device indicated by the target device identifier is the first device;
  • Mode 3 When the destination address is the same as the address of the first relay terminal, and the first relay terminal is the first relay terminal connected to the access network device, determine to receive the first data The interface used by the package; when the interface is a Uu interface, determine that the device indicated by the target device identifier is the first device; when the interface is a PC5 interface, determine that the first device is the first device access network equipment.
  • the address of the relay terminal can be used as the routing indication information to guide the routing transmission of the data packet, so as to ensure the routing between the AN device and the remote UE in the multi-hop communication scenario.
  • the second data packet is the same as the first data packet.
  • the first relay device can transmit the first data packet to the determined transmission object when it is determined that the transmission object is the next-hop node or the access network device.
  • the first routing indication information further includes a target path identifier.
  • the first routing indication information includes a target path identifier; the first data packet has the first protocol layer header; in this case, the first relay terminal can use the following way to determine the first device:
  • Manner 1 when the first routing indication information has a corresponding next-hop node device identifier, determine the first device according to the next-hop node device identifier;
  • Manner 2 when the first routing indication information does not have a corresponding next-hop node device identifier, determine that the device indicated by the target device identifier is the first device.
  • the first relay terminal can determine the transmission object in different ways under different conditions of whether the first routing indication information has the corresponding next-hop node device identification.
  • the first relay terminal may determine the first device according to the device identifier of the next-hop node in the following manner:
  • Manner 1 when the device identifier of the next-hop node indicates a second relay terminal connected to the first relay terminal, determine that the first device is the second relay terminal;
  • Manner 3 when the next-hop node device identifier indicates the first relay terminal, determine that the device indicated by the target device identifier is the first device.
  • the first relay terminal can determine different transmission objects when the device identifier of the next hop node indicates different communication devices.
  • next-hop node device identification when the next-hop node device identification is a first default device identification, the next-hop node device identification indicates the first relay terminal; the next-hop node device identification is When the second default device identifier is used, the device identifier of the next hop node indicates the access network device.
  • the second data packet is the same as the first data packet.
  • the first relay device can transmit the first data packet to the determined transmission object when determining that the transmission object is the second relay terminal or access network device to which it is connected.
  • the first routing indication information further includes a transmission direction indication, where the transmission direction indication is used to indicate uplink transmission or downlink transmission.
  • the first relay device may determine that the device indicated by the target device identifier is the first device through the following steps: when the target device identifier indicates access to the first device When the first remote terminal of the relay terminal is used, it is determined that the first device is the first remote terminal. In this case, the first relay terminal may transmit the second data packet to the first device through the following steps:
  • the first relay terminal can transmit the data packet without the protocol layer header to the first remote terminal.
  • the first protocol layer header further includes a bearer identifier, where the bearer identifier is used to indicate a target bearer used for transmitting the first data packet; the first relay device can use the The following steps determine that the device indicated by the target device identifier is the first device: when the target device identifier indicates a first remote terminal accessing the first relay terminal, determine the first device is the first remote terminal. In this case, the first relay terminal may transmit the second data packet to the first device in the following manner:
  • Manner 1 Delete the first routing indication information and the target device identifier contained in the first protocol layer in the first data packet to obtain the second data packet, the first data packet in the second data packet.
  • a protocol layer header includes the bearer identifier; transmitting the second data packet to the first device;
  • Method 2 Decapsulate the first data packet to obtain a target data packet; wherein, the target data packet does not have a first protocol layer header; add a first protocol layer header to the target data packet to generate the target data packet. the second data packet, wherein the first protocol layer header of the second data packet includes the bearer identifier; transmitting the second data packet to the first device;
  • Manner 3 The second data packet that is the same as the first data packet is transmitted to the first device.
  • the first relay terminal may transmit to the first device the second data packet whose first protocol layer header only includes the bearer identifier. In the third manner, the first relay terminal may transmit the first data packet to the first device.
  • the first relay terminal may further determine that the data carried in the first data packet is the first relay terminal. following the terminal data.
  • the target device identification when the target device identification is a third default device identification, the target device identification indicates the first relay terminal.
  • the first relay terminal may transmit the second data packet to the first device through the following steps:
  • a first protocol layer header is added to the first data packet to generate the second data packet; wherein the first protocol layer header of the second data packet includes the first routing indication information and the target device identification; transmitting the second data packet to the first device.
  • the first relay terminal can transmit the second data packet carrying the first protocol layer header to the first device.
  • the first relay terminal when the first relay terminal is connected to the access network device through the second relay terminal, the first relay terminal may also generate a third data packet, wherein the The third data packet does not contain the first protocol layer header; the third data packet is transmitted to the second relay terminal; or a fourth data packet is generated through the following steps, and the third data packet is transmitted to the second relay terminal Four packets:
  • determining the second routing indication information of the third data packet determining the second routing indication information of the third data packet; adding a first protocol layer header to the third data packet to generate a fourth data packet; wherein the first protocol layer header of the fourth data packet contains The second routing indication information and the device identification of the first relay terminal.
  • the first relay terminal can transmit its own data packet carrying the first protocol layer header, or a data packet not carrying the first protocol layer header to the second relay terminal.
  • the device identifier of the first relay terminal is allocated by the second relay terminal to the first relay terminal; or, the device identifier of the first relay terminal is The first relay terminal is allocated by the second relay terminal; or the device identifier of the first relay terminal is the first default device identifier.
  • the first relay terminal may use the first logical channel to transmit the second data packet to the first device; the first relay device may use the second logical channel, The third data packet is transmitted to the second relay terminal; wherein the first logical channel is different from the second logical channel.
  • the first relay terminal can use different logical channels to respectively transmit data packets carrying the first protocol layer header and data packets not carrying the first protocol layer header, so as to determine the type of data packet through the logical channel. Differentiate, so that the transmission object can differentiate the received data packets according to the logical channel.
  • the first relay terminal may obtain the second data packet in the following manner:
  • Method 1 Add the first routing indication information and the target device identifier to the first protocol layer header of the first data packet to obtain the second data packet, the first data packet in the second data packet.
  • a protocol layer header includes the bearer identifier, the first routing indication information and the target device identifier;
  • Method 2 Decapsulate the first data packet to obtain a target data packet; wherein, the target data packet does not have a first protocol layer header; add a first protocol layer header to the target data packet to generate the target data packet The second data packet, wherein the first protocol layer header of the second data packet includes the bearer identifier, the first routing indication information and the target device identifier.
  • the first relay terminal can transmit to the first device the second data packet in the first protocol layer whose header contains the first routing indication information and the target device identifier, so that the first device continues to follow the first routing indication information and target device identification to transmit the second data packet.
  • the first relay terminal may determine the address of the next hop node corresponding to the first routing indication information through the following steps, including:
  • the target routing information determine target routing information that includes the first routing indication information; wherein the target routing information includes the first routing indication information and the next route corresponding to the first routing indication information A hop node address; the next hop node address corresponding to the first route indication information is determined in the target routing information.
  • the first relay terminal can determine the address of the next hop node corresponding to the first routing indication information according to the stored routing information.
  • the first relay terminal may determine the first routing indication information when determining the target routing information including the first routing indication information There is a corresponding next-hop node device identification; wherein, the target routing information includes the first routing indication information and the next-hop node device identification corresponding to the first routing indication information; or when the stored at least In one piece of routing information, the first relay terminal may determine that the first routing indication information does not have a corresponding next-hop node device identifier when the target routing information is not found.
  • the first relay terminal can determine whether the first routing indication information has the device identifier of the next hop node according to whether the target routing information is found.
  • the first relay terminal may acquire the at least one routing information in the following manner:
  • Manner 1 Acquire the at least one routing information from an access network device
  • Manner 2 When the first relay terminal is connected to an access network device through a second relay terminal, the at least one routing information is acquired from the second relay terminal.
  • the communication system can flexibly configure the routing information of the first relay terminal.
  • the target device identification is a local identification (local ID) or a layer 2 identification (L2 ID) of the target device.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a routing method, which is applied to an access network device.
  • the method may be executed by the access network device, or executed by components such as a chip, a processor, or a chip system in the access network device.
  • the following method is performed by an access network device as an example, and the method is described in detail. The method has the following steps:
  • the access network device acquires the first data packet, and the first data packet does not have the first protocol layer header; the access network device determines the first routing indication information and the first target device identifier of the first data packet, The first target device indicated by the first target device identifier is the destination device of the first data packet, and the first route indication information is used to indicate the transmission route of the first data packet; the connection The network access device adds a first protocol layer header to the first data packet to generate a second data packet; wherein, the first protocol layer header of the second data packet includes the first routing indication information and the first routing indication information.
  • a target device identifier; the access network device determines a relay terminal according to the first routing indication information, and transmits a second data packet to the relay terminal.
  • the access network device can determine the transmission object according to the first routing indication information of the first data packet, so as to transmit the data in the first data packet to the transmission object.
  • the access network device can guide the routing transmission of the data packet through the routing indication information, so as to ensure the routing between the AN device and the remote UE in the multi-hop communication scenario.
  • the access network device may also receive a third data packet sent by the relay terminal; wherein the third data packet has a first protocol layer header, and the third data packet
  • the first protocol layer header contains second routing indication information and a second target device identifier; the second target device indicated by the second target device identifier is the source device of the third data packet, and the second route
  • the indication information is used to indicate the transmission route of the third data packet; the access network device decapsulates the third data packet to obtain a fourth data packet, and the fourth data packet does not have the first protocol layer head.
  • the access network device may further determine a first bearer identifier of the first data packet; wherein the first bearer identifier is used to indicate a data packet used for transmitting the first data packet The first bearer; the first protocol layer header of the second data packet further includes the first bearer identifier.
  • the first protocol layer header of the second data packet transmitted by the access network device further includes the first bearer identifier.
  • the first protocol layer header of the third data packet further includes a second bearer identifier, where the second bearer identifier is used to indicate the second bearer used for transmitting the third data packet .
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a routing method, which is applied to a remote terminal.
  • the method may be executed by the remote terminal, or executed by components such as a chip, a processor, or a chip system in the remote terminal.
  • the following method is performed by a remote terminal as an example, and the method is described in detail. The method has the following steps:
  • the remote terminal After acquiring the first data packet, the remote terminal determines the first routing indication information and the target device identifier of the first data packet, where the first routing indication information of the first data packet is used to indicate the destination of the first data packet. transmission route; the target device identifier is the device identifier of the remote terminal; the remote terminal adds a first protocol layer header to the first data packet to generate a second data packet; wherein, the second data packet The first protocol layer header of the packet includes the first routing indication information and the first target device identifier; the remote terminal sends the second data packet to the relay terminal.
  • the remote terminal can transmit the second data packet containing the first routing indication information of the first data packet and the target device identification in the protocol layer header to the relay terminal, so that the relay terminal can The first routing indication information is combined with the target device identification to determine the transmission object.
  • the remote terminal can guide the routing transmission of the data packet through the routing indication information, so as to ensure the routing between the remote UE and the AN device in the multi-hop communication scenario.
  • the remote terminal may also receive a third data packet from the relay terminal, where the third data packet has a first protocol layer header, and the third data packet has a first protocol layer header.
  • the first protocol layer header contains second routing indication information and the target device identifier; the second routing indication information is used to indicate the transmission route of the second data packet; the remote terminal responds to the third data packet
  • the packet is decapsulated to obtain a fourth data packet, where the fourth data packet does not have the first protocol layer header.
  • the remote terminal may further determine a first bearer identifier of the first data packet; wherein the first bearer identifier is used to indicate the first bearer identifier used for transmitting the first data packet A bearer; the first protocol layer header of the second data packet further includes the first bearer identifier.
  • the first protocol layer header of the second data packet transmitted by the remote terminal further includes the first bearer identifier.
  • the first protocol layer header of the third data packet further includes a second bearer identifier, where the second bearer identifier is used to indicate the second bearer used for transmitting the third data packet .
  • the remote terminal may determine that the first routing indication information is the stored routing indication information corresponding to the first remote terminal.
  • the remote terminal may receive route indication information corresponding to the first remote terminal from the access network device or the relay terminal, and the route corresponding to the first remote terminal
  • the indication information is dedicated route indication information of the first remote terminal, or default route indication information.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a routing method, which is applied to the first relay terminal.
  • the method may be executed by the first relay terminal, or executed by components such as a chip, a processor, or a chip system in the first relay terminal.
  • the method is performed by the first relay terminal as an example below, and the method is described in detail.
  • the method has the following steps:
  • the first relay terminal receives a first data packet, wherein the first data packet has a first protocol layer header, the first protocol layer header includes first routing indication information and a target device identifier, and the first The routing indication information is used to indicate the transmission route of the first data packet; the target device indicated by the target device identifier is the destination device or the source device of the first data packet; Obtain the first routing indication information and the target device identification from the first data packet; and determine the first device according to the first routing indication information, or according to the first routing indication information and the target device identification ; the first relay terminal transmits the first data packet to the first device.
  • the first relay terminal can determine the transmission object according to the received first routing indication information of the first data packet and in combination with the target device identifier of the first data packet, so as to transmit the first data packet to the transfer object.
  • this method can guide the routing transmission of data packets through routing indication information, or routing indication and target device identification, so as to ensure the routing between the AN device and the remote UE in the multi-hop communication scenario.
  • the first routing indication information includes a target node address; in this case, the first relay terminal may determine the first device in the following manner:
  • Manner 1 when the address of the target node is different from the address of the first relay terminal, determine the address of the next hop node corresponding to the first routing indication information; determine that the first device is the next hop The next hop node indicated by the node address;
  • Mode 2 when the address of the target node is the same as the address of the first relay terminal, determine that the device indicated by the target device identifier is the first device;
  • Mode 3 When the address of the target node is the same as the address of the first relay terminal, and the first relay terminal is the first relay terminal connected to the access network device, the first relay The terminal determines the interface used to receive the first data packet; when the interface is a Uu interface, determine that the device indicated by the target device identifier is the first device; when the interface is a PC5 interface, determine The first device is the access network device.
  • the address of the relay terminal can be used as the routing indication information to guide the routing transmission of the data packet, so as to ensure the routing between the AN device and the remote UE in the multi-hop communication scenario.
  • the first routing indication information further includes a target path identifier.
  • the first relay terminal may determine that the first device is the first remote terminal. a remote terminal.
  • the first relay terminal may further determine that the data carried in the first data packet is the first relay terminal. following the terminal data.
  • the target device identification when the target device identification is a default device identification, the target device identification indicates the first relay terminal.
  • the first relay terminal may determine the address of the next hop node corresponding to the first routing indication information through the following steps:
  • the target routing information determine target routing information that includes the first routing indication information; wherein the target routing information includes the first routing indication information and the next route corresponding to the first routing indication information
  • the hop node address; the next hop node address corresponding to the first route indication information is determined in the target routing information.
  • the first relay terminal can determine the address of the next hop node corresponding to the first routing indication information according to the stored routing information.
  • the first relay terminal may acquire the at least one routing information in the following manner:
  • Manner 1 Acquire the at least one routing information from an access network device
  • Manner 2 When the first relay terminal is connected to an access network device through a second relay terminal, acquire the at least one routing information from the second relay terminal.
  • the communication system can flexibly configure the routing information of the first relay terminal.
  • the target device identification is a local ID (local ID) of the target device.
  • the first protocol layer header of the first data packet further includes a bearer identifier; the bearer identifier is used to indicate the first bearer used for transmitting the first data packet.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication apparatus, including a unit for performing each step in any of the above aspects.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication device, comprising at least one processing element and at least one storage element, wherein the at least one storage element is used to store programs and data, and the at least one processing element is used to read and execute Programs and data stored by the storage element, so that the method provided by any of the above aspects of the present application is implemented.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, including a first relay terminal capable of implementing the method provided in the first aspect, and an access network device capable of implementing the method provided in the second aspect.
  • the communication system may further include a remote terminal capable of implementing the method provided by the third aspect.
  • an embodiment of the present application provides a communication system, including a first relay terminal capable of implementing the method provided in the fourth aspect, an access network device capable of implementing the method provided in the second aspect, and a third relay terminal capable of implementing the method provided in the second aspect.
  • a remote terminal of the method provided by the aspect is a communication system, including a first relay terminal capable of implementing the method provided in the fourth aspect, an access network device capable of implementing the method provided in the second aspect, and a third relay terminal capable of implementing the method provided in the second aspect.
  • the embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program, which, when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the method provided in any of the foregoing aspects.
  • embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer is made to execute any one of the above methods provided.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a chip, where the chip is configured to read a computer program stored in a memory and execute the method provided in any of the foregoing aspects.
  • an embodiment of the present application further provides a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor for supporting a computer device to implement the method provided in any of the foregoing aspects.
  • the chip system further includes a memory for storing necessary programs and data of the computer device.
  • the chip system can be composed of chips, and can also include chips and other discrete devices.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic diagram of the architecture of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 2 is a flowchart of a routing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 3 is a flowchart of an AN device notifying an address of a counterparty between two adjacent UEs in a communication link, according to an embodiment of the present application;
  • FIG. 4 is a flowchart of a routing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 5 is a schematic diagram of a protocol stack of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 6 is a schematic diagram of a routing mechanism provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 7 is a schematic diagram of a routing mechanism provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 8 is a schematic diagram of a routing mechanism provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 9 is a flowchart of a routing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 10 is a flowchart of configuring default route indication information on an AN device according to an embodiment of the present application
  • FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a protocol stack of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 12 is a schematic diagram of a routing mechanism provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 13 is a schematic diagram of a routing mechanism provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 14 is a schematic diagram of a routing mechanism provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 15 is a flowchart of a routing method provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 16 is a flowchart of a routing mechanism provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 17 is a schematic diagram of a protocol stack of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 18 is a schematic diagram of a protocol stack of a communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 19A is a schematic diagram of a BAP header processing process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • 19B is a schematic diagram of a BAP header processing process provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 20 is a structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the present application.
  • FIG. 21 is a structural diagram of a communication device provided by an embodiment of the application.
  • the present application provides a routing method and apparatus for implementing routing between an AN device and a remote UE in a multi-hop communication scenario.
  • the method and the device are based on the same technical concept. Since the principles of the method and the device for solving problems are similar, the implementation of the device and the method can be referred to each other, and repeated descriptions will not be repeated here.
  • An access network (AN) device is a device that connects a terminal device to a wireless network in a mobile communication system.
  • the AN device as a node in a radio access network, may also be referred to as a base station, and may also be referred to as a radio access network (radio access network, RAN) node (or device).
  • RAN radio access network
  • AN equipment are: a new generation of node B (generated node B, gNB), transmission reception point (transmission reception point, TRP), evolved node B (evolved Node B, eNB), radio network controller (radio network controller, RNC), Node B (Node B, NB), access point (access point, AP) base station controller (base station controller, BSC), base transceiver station (base transceiver station, BTS), home base station (such as , home evolved NodeB, or home Node B, HNB), or base band unit (base band unit, BBU), enterprise LTE discrete narrowband aggregation (Enterprise LTE Discrete Spectrum Aggregation, eLTE-DSA) base station, etc.
  • node B generated node B, gNB
  • transmission reception point transmission reception point
  • eNB evolved node B
  • RNC radio network controller
  • Node B Node B
  • AP access point
  • base station controller base station controller
  • BTS base transceiver
  • the AN device may include a centralized unit (centralized unit, CU) node and a distributed unit (distributed unit, DU) node.
  • CU centralized unit
  • DU distributed unit
  • This structure splits the protocol layers of the network equipment, and the functions of some protocol layers are centrally controlled by the CU, and the functions of the remaining part or all of the protocol layers are distributed in the DU, and the CU centrally controls the DU.
  • a terminal is a device that provides voice and/or data connectivity to a user.
  • a terminal may also be called a terminal device, a user equipment (UE), a mobile station (mobile station, MS), a mobile terminal (mobile terminal, MT), a terminal, and the like.
  • UE user equipment
  • MS mobile station
  • MT mobile terminal
  • terminal and the like.
  • only the UE is taken as an example for description.
  • the terminal may be a handheld device with a wireless connection function, various in-vehicle devices, a roadside unit, or the like.
  • terminal devices are: mobile phone (mobile phone), tablet computer, notebook computer, PDA, mobile internet device (MID), smart point of sale (POS), wearable device, Virtual reality (VR) equipment, augmented reality (AR) equipment, head mount display (HMD), wireless terminals in industrial control (industrial control), unmanned driving (self driving) wireless terminal in remote medical surgery, wireless terminal in smart grid, wireless terminal in transportation safety, wireless terminal in smart city, Wireless terminals in smart home, various smart meters (smart water meter, smart electricity meter, smart gas meter), eLTE-DSA UE, equipment with integrated access and backhaul (IAB) capability , vehicle electronic control unit (electronic control unit, ECU), etc., vehicle computer, vehicle cruise system, telematics box (telematics box, T-BOX), etc.
  • MID mobile internet device
  • POS smart point of sale
  • POS wearable device
  • the first protocol layer header is other protocol layer headers that are different from existing protocol layer (MAC layer, RLC layer, PDCP layer, etc.) headers.
  • the first protocol layer may be an adaptation layer, such as a backhaul adaptation protocol (BAP).
  • BAP backhaul adaptation protocol
  • the first protocol layer header is an adaptation layer header, such as a BAP header. In the following embodiments, only the first protocol layer header is the BAP header as an example for description.
  • Transmission direction the link formed by the terminal side and the network side includes an uplink transmission direction and a downlink transmission direction.
  • the uplink transmission direction is used to indicate uplink transmission, that is, the terminal side transmits data or messages to the network side;
  • the downlink transmission direction is used to indicate downlink transmission, that is, the network side transmits data or messages to the terminal side.
  • Route indication information which is used to indicate the transmission route of the data packet (data carried in the data packet), that is, used to guide the transmission/forwarding of the data packet, or to guide the transmission of the data packet from a certain device to another device.
  • the routing indication information contained in the data packet is used to determine the transmission object, so that the data packet can be transmitted to the transmission object.
  • the routing indication information can guide the transmission of data packets from the remote UE to the AN device; in other embodiments, the routing indication information can guide the data packets from the link The last relay UE of the link transmits to the AN device; in some other embodiments, the routing indication information may also instruct the data packet to be transmitted from the tail relay UE to the head relay UE in the link.
  • the routing indication information can guide the data packet to be transmitted from the AN device to the remote UE; in other embodiments, the routing indication information can guide the data packet from the link in the link
  • the head relay UE/AN device transmits to the tail relay UE. It should be noted that, in the case where the routing indication information can guide the transmission to the end relay UE, if the relay UE in the link determines through the routing indication information that it is not the end relay UE, it can also be combined with the data packet.
  • the target device identifier is used to determine the transmission object so that the data packet can be transmitted to the remote UE.
  • FIG. 1 shows the architecture of a communication system to which the routing method provided by the embodiment of the present application is applicable.
  • the system includes: AN equipment, and multiple UEs (UE1-UE11 in FIG. 1).
  • the AN device is an entity capable of receiving and transmitting wireless signals on the network side, and is responsible for providing services related to wireless access for UEs in the cells it manages, implementing physical layer functions, resource scheduling and wireless resource management, and quality of service ( Quality of Service, QoS) management, wireless access control and mobility management functions.
  • QoS Quality of Service
  • the UE is an entity capable of receiving and transmitting wireless signals on the user side, and needs to access the AN device to finally access the network.
  • the UE may be a variety of devices that provide voice and/or data connectivity to the user.
  • the U2N technology is introduced, that is, the UE in the system can access the AN device through at least one UE to form single-hop communication or multi-hop communication.
  • the present application introduces two concepts of relay UE and remote UE.
  • the relay UE can establish a connection between one device (remote UE or relay UE) and another device (relay UE or AN device), so that the two can communicate.
  • the remote UE is the initiating device of the service, the destination device that finally receives the user data or the source device that generates the user data.
  • the remote UE is one end of a communication link (eg, an RRC connection) and the other end is an AN device.
  • the multiple relay UEs between the AN device and the remote UE can be divided into three categories:
  • the head relay UE that is, the relay UE directly connected with the AN device.
  • the relay UE at the end is the relay UE directly connected to the remote UE.
  • Common relay UE that is, the UE between the head relay UE and the tail relay UE.
  • relay UEs between the AN device and the remote UE when the number of relay UEs between the AN device and the remote UE is 2, one of the two relay UEs is the head relay UE and the other is the end relay UE; only when the AN device When the number of relay UEs between the remote UE and the remote UE is greater than or equal to 3, these relay UEs only include the above three types of relay UEs.
  • UE1 is a remote UE
  • UE4 is a head relay UE
  • UE3 is a common relay UE
  • UE2 is a Relay UE at the end.
  • some UEs may serve as relay UEs of other remote UEs on the one hand, and may also be used as remote UEs to connect to the AN device through at least one relay UE on the other hand.
  • UE2 acts as a relay UE in the above-mentioned link 1, in the communication link of UE2-UE3-UE4-AN device, UE2 is a remote UE.
  • the AN device and the UE are connected through mobile communication technology, and the two can be connected through an air interface (ie Uu interface), so as to realize the communication connection between the UE and the AN device.
  • This communication connection may be referred to as a Uu communication connection or a cellular network communication connection).
  • the AN device is connected with UE4, UE7, and UE8 through Uu interface respectively.
  • the two adjacent UEs are connected through the sidelink (SL) communication technology, and a direct link can be established between the two through the ProSe communication 5 (PC5) interface.
  • SL sidelink
  • PC5 ProSe communication 5
  • a communication connection between the two this communication connection may be referred to as an SL communication connection).
  • the sidelink communication technology is a near-field communication technology that can be directly connected between UEs, also known as proximity services (proximity services, ProSe) communication technology, or device to device (device to device, D2D) communication technology.
  • ProSe proximity services
  • D2D device to device
  • the sidelink communication technology supports broadcast, multicast and unicast transmission in cell coverage, out-of-cell coverage and partial cell coverage scenarios.
  • the Uu interface and the PC5 interface both include a control plane protocol stack and a user plane protocol stack.
  • the user plane protocol stack includes at least the following protocol layers: physical (PHY) layer, MAC layer, radio link control (radio link control, RLC) layer and packet data convergence protocol (packet data convergence protocol, PDCP) Layer, service data adaptation protocol (service data adaptation protocol, SDAP) layer;
  • the control plane protocol stack at least includes the following protocol layers: physical layer, MAC layer, RLC layer, PDCP layer, radio resource control (radio resource control, RRC) layer.
  • the communication system shown in FIG. 1 is taken as an example, and does not constitute a limitation on the communication system to which the method provided in the embodiment of the present application is applicable.
  • the methods provided in the embodiments of the present application are applicable to various communication systems supporting multi-hop communication technologies, such as end-to-end (UE to UE, U2U) systems.
  • the embodiments of the present application can also be applied to various types and standards of communication systems, for example, the 5th Generation (The 5th Generation, 5G) communication system, the Long Term Evolution (Long Term Evolution, LTE) communication system, the vehicle to everything (vehicle to everything) everything, V2X), Long Term Evolution-Vehicle (LTE-Vehicle, LTE-V), Vehicle to Vehicle (V2V), Internet of Vehicles, Machine Type Communications (MTC), Internet of Things (internet of things, IoT), Long Term Evolution-Machine to Machine (LTE-machine to machine, LTE-M), Machine to Machine (M2M), Enterprise LTE Discrete Spectrum Aggregation (eLTE-DSA) systems, etc., are not limited in the embodiments of the present application.
  • 5G The 5th Generation, 5G
  • LTE Long Term Evolution-Vehicle
  • V2V Vehicle to Vehicle
  • MTC Machine Type Communications
  • IoT Internet of Things
  • link 1 the communication link of UE1-UE2-UE3-UE4-AN equipment in the communication system shown in FIG. 1 (referred to as link 1) involves three types (a head relay UE, a common relay UE and a tail relay UE) Relay UE), in the following embodiments, link 1 is mainly used as an example for description. It is worth noting that the embodiments of the present application are not limited to be applicable to designing only three types of links, and can also be applied to other various links.
  • Example 1 The method provided in this embodiment of the present application may also be applied to other links having one head relay UE, multiple common relay UEs, and one tail relay UE.
  • the steps performed by each common relay UE may refer to the steps performed by UE3 in the following embodiments of the present application; the head relay UE may refer to the steps performed by UE4 in the following embodiments of the present application ; and the end relay UE may refer to the steps performed by UE2 in the following embodiments of the present application.
  • Example 2 The method provided in this embodiment of the present application may also be applied to a link having one head relay UE and one tail relay UE. Similar to Example 1, the head relay UE may refer to the steps performed by UE4 in the following embodiments of the present application; and the end relay UE may refer to the steps performed by UE2 in the following embodiments of the present application.
  • Example 3 The method provided in this embodiment of the present application can also be applied to a link of single-hop communication, that is, a link in which an end UE accesses an AN device through a relay UE.
  • the relay UE is both the head relay UE and the end relay UE, so the steps performed by the relay UE may refer to the steps performed by UE2 and UE4 in the following embodiments.
  • each step involved in the following embodiments may be performed by a corresponding device, or may be performed by components such as a chip, a processor, or a chip system in the device, which are not constituted by the embodiments of the present application. limited.
  • the following embodiments are only described by taking the execution by a corresponding device as an example.
  • the address of the relay UE is used as the routing indication information to guide the routing transmission of the data packet. Referring to the flowchart of the routing method shown in FIG. 2 , the method provided by this embodiment will be described in detail below.
  • the AN device configures an address (address, may be abbreviated as add. hereinafter) and at least one piece of routing information for each relay UE in the communication system, and sends default route indication information to each relay UE. Since this embodiment takes the above link 1 as an example, the figure only schematically shows that the AN device configures addresses and routing information for UE2, UE3, and UE4, as well as default routing indication information.
  • the AN device sends the default route indication information to each relay UE.
  • the default route indication information is specified by the communication protocol or preset inside the relay UE. In this case, the AN device may not need to send the default route indication information to each relay UE.
  • the AN device will allocate an address to each relay UE, which is used to uniquely identify each relay UE within the coverage of the AN device or in a cell managed by the AN device.
  • the address of the relay UE may be a dedicated identifier, and may also be referred to as a relay identifier, a relay address, or the like, which is not limited in this application.
  • the address allocated to the UE may be obtained from the AN device.
  • the AN device may send indication information to the AN device, and the indication information may indicate that it becomes a relay UE; after receiving the indication information, the AN device may assign an address to the UE.
  • the UE may be a UE that is directly connected to the AN device through the Uu interface, or may be a UE that is connected to the AN device through other relay UEs, which is not limited in this application.
  • the addresses allocated by the AN device to UE2, UE3, and UE4 respectively are add.UE2, add.UE3, and add.UE4 as an example for description.
  • the AN device In order to implement the routing function, the AN device also needs to provide at least one piece of routing information for each relay UE.
  • any piece of routing information includes a routing indication information and a next-hop node address corresponding to the routing indication information.
  • the routing indication information includes the destination address.
  • the destination address can be understood as the address of the destination relay UE.
  • the at least one routing information provided by the AN device for each relay UE includes downlink routing information and uplink routing information. distinguish.
  • the AN device itself is not configured with an address, and the remote UE in the link is not configured with an address. Based on this, for downlink transmission, the relay UE at the end of each link has no next-hop node, so the AN device will not allocate downlink routing information to it. Similarly, for uplink transmission, the head relay UE in each link also has no next-hop node, so the AN device will not allocate corresponding uplink routing information to it.
  • the AN device also needs to provide default route indication information for each relay UE.
  • the relay UE may transmit the first data packet of the newly accessed remote UE according to the default indication information.
  • the default route indication information includes add.xxx as an example.
  • Table 1 Routing information for UE2
  • the AN device Since UE2 is the last relay UE in link 1, the AN device will not allocate downlink routing information to it. Therefore, in the above Table 1, the two routing information are uplink routing information.
  • Table 2 Routing information for UE3
  • the first and second pieces of routing information are uplink routing information
  • the third piece is downlink routing information
  • Table 3 Routing information for UE4
  • the AN device Since UE4 is the head relay UE in link 1, the AN device will not allocate uplink routing information to it. Therefore, in the above Table 3, the two pieces of routing information are both downlink routing information.
  • the AN device can separately configure the address, routing information, and default routing indication information of any relay UE through different messages; it can also configure the above three items of the relay UE simultaneously through the same message. configuration, which is not limited in this application.
  • the AN device can change the topology relationship of the relay UE in the communication system, the above steps are performed to update the routing information of the relay UE; or the AN device can perform the above steps regularly or periodically. This is not limited.
  • UE1 establishes an SL communication connection with UE2, and UE2 allocates a local ID (Local ID) to UE1, and the local ID of UE1 is hereinafter denoted as LID-UE1.
  • the local identifier is used within the range of the relay UE to identify other UEs that access the relay UE through the establishment of the SL direct link, different relay UEs are assigned to the access UE.
  • Local IDs can be the same.
  • the local identity allocated by UE2 to UE1 is 1
  • the local identity allocated by UE3 to UE2 is 1
  • the local identity allocated by UE3 to UE6 is 2.
  • the local identifier can also be understood as a local index (local index) within the scope of a relay UE.
  • the UE1 In order to establish the Uu communication connection between the UE1 and the AN device, the UE1 generates a first data packet, where the first data packet includes the first message sent by the UE1 to the network side.
  • the first data packet includes an RRC connection establishment request.
  • UE1 sends a first data packet to UE2 with which the SL communication connection is established, wherein the first data packet does not have a BAP header.
  • UE2 receives the first data packet from UE1.
  • UE2 takes the default route indication information (ie add.xxx) as the target route indication information of the first data packet ;
  • the target routing information such as the table that contains the target routing indication information
  • the next-hop node address ie add.UE3 corresponding to the target routing indication information in the target routing information, and determine that the transmission object is the next-hop node indicated by the next-hop node address ( That is, UE3 indicated by add.UE3).
  • UE2 determines that the local identifier of the target device of the first data packet is the local identifier of the source device of the first data packet (that is, the local identifier of UE1: LID-UE1); and adds BAP to the first data packet header, to generate a second data packet, wherein the BAP header of the second data packet includes the target routing indication information add.xxx and the local identification LID-UE1 of the target device.
  • UE2 sends the second data packet to UE3.
  • UE3 receives the second data packet from UE2.
  • two adjacent relay UEs In order to realize the routing function, two adjacent relay UEs also need to obtain the address of each other, so that the relay UE can accurately determine the address of the next hop node according to the address of the next hop node during the routing transmission process.
  • the indicated transfer object In this embodiment of the present application, two adjacent relay UEs may, but are not limited to, determine the address of each other in the following two ways:
  • Manner 1 After two adjacent relay UEs obtain their own addresses from the AN device respectively, they exchange each other's addresses through the SL communication connection between them. Taking UE2 and UE3 as examples, after UE2 becomes a relay UE and obtains the address add.UE2, it sends its own address add.UE2 to UE3; after receiving the address of UE2, UE3 sends its own address add.UE3 to UE2.
  • the AN device may provide each relay UE with the address of its adjacent relay UE. It should be noted that, when providing the address of the adjacent second relay UE to the first relay UE, the AN device also needs to carry the indication information of the second relay UE, so that the first relay UE can Second, the indication information of the relay UE determines that the received address of the second relay UE belongs to the second relay UE.
  • UE3 is the parent relay of UE2, and UE3 will provide UE2 with a local identifier (LID-UE2), so the AN device is sending UE3 to UE3.
  • the first message not only includes the address of UE2, but also includes the local identifier (LID-UE2) allocated by UE3 for UE2.
  • UE2 is a sub-relay of UE3, and UE2 can identify the layer 2 identifier of UE3 (ie L2ID-UE3)/cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) (ie C-RNTI-UE3) ), therefore, the second message sent by the AN device to UE2 not only includes the address of UE3, but also includes the layer 2 identifier or C-RNTI of UE3 (ie, L2 ID-UE3/C-RNTI-UE3).
  • the layer 2 identifier of UE3 ie L2ID-UE3)/cell-radio network temporary identifier (C-RNTI) (ie C-RNTI-UE3)
  • C-RNTI cell-radio network temporary identifier
  • the layer 2 identifier of UE3 is the identifier used by UE2 and UE3 for SL communication. If the AN device also carries the layer 2 identifier L2ID-UE3 of UE3 when notifying UE2 of the address of UE3, UE3 needs to notify the AN device in advance. Report its own Layer 2 ID.
  • S301 The AN allocates the address add.UE3 to the UE3 that previously established the Uu communication connection.
  • S303 UE2 establishes a Uu communication connection with the AN device, and during the process of establishing the Uu communication connection, UE2 or UE3 sends the local identifier LID-UE2 of UE2 to the AN device.
  • the AN device sends a first message to the UE3, where the first message carries the address add.UE2 of the UE2 and the local identifier LID-UE2 of the UE2.
  • S306 UE3 sends to the AN device the layer 2 identifier L2 ID-UE2 of the relay UE that it acts as a relay.
  • the embodiment of the present application does not limit the time when UE3 executes S306, and S306 may be executed at any time after S301 and before S307.
  • the AN device sends a second message to UE2, where the second message includes the address add.UE3 of UE3, and the layer 2 identifier or C-RNTI of UE3 (ie, L2 ID-UE2/C-RNTI-UE3).
  • step of allocating an address to UE2 by the AN device and providing the address of UE3 to UE2 may be implemented through this one message, that is, S304 and S307 may be performed simultaneously, which is not limited in this application.
  • UE2 and UE3 can determine each other's address and indication information. In this way, when UE2 subsequently determines that the address of the next hop node is the address add.UE3 of UE3, it can identify the transmission object as UE3 according to the L2 ID-UE2/C-RNTI-UE3 corresponding to the add.UE3, and can identify the transmission object as UE3 according to the L2 ID-UE2/C-RNTI-UE3 corresponding to the add.UE3. ID-UE2/C-RNTI-UE3 transmits data packets to UE3.
  • UE3 when UE3 subsequently determines that the address of the next hop node is the address add.UE2 of UE2, it can identify that the transmission object is UE2 according to the LID-UE2 corresponding to the add.UE2, and can transmit data to UE2 according to the LID-UE2 Bag.
  • the AN device may also provide addresses of adjacent relay UEs to other relay UEs in the above manner.
  • the AN device may also notify UE3 and UE4 of each other's addresses, respectively.
  • the AN device may also notify UE1 and UE2 of the address of the other party in the above manner.
  • the UE3 After receiving the second data packet, the UE3 obtains the target routing indication information (that is, the default routing indication information add.xxx) of the second data packet from the BAP header of the second data packet; when determining the purpose included in the target routing indication information
  • the address (add.xxx) is different from its own address (add.UE3)
  • at least one of the stored routing information determines the target routing information (for example, item 2 in Table 2) that contains the target routing indication information.
  • the routing information determine the address of the next hop node corresponding to the target routing indication information (ie add.UE4), and determine that the transmission object is the next hop node indicated by the address of the next hop node (ie, UE4 indicated by add.UE4) .
  • UE3 sends the second data packet to UE4.
  • UE4 receives the second data packet from UE3.
  • the UE4 serving as the header relay UE can obtain the target route indication information (that is, the default route indication information add.xxx) of the second data packet from the BAP header of the second data packet; when When the UE4 determines that the destination address (add.xxx) contained in the target routing indication information is different from its own address (add.UE3), the UE4 determines that the transmission object is the AN device according to the target routing indication information. UE4 sends the second data packet to the AN device. The AN device receives the second data packet from UE4.
  • the target route indication information that is, the default route indication information add.xxx
  • UE4 is the head relay UE, therefore, there is no uplink routing information in the routing information configured by the AN device, so UE4 needs to determine the transmission object by other methods other than matching routing information.
  • UE4 Since UE4 is the head relay UE, its next hop in the uplink direction is the AN device. Based on this, in one embodiment, when UE4 determines that the destination address (add.xxx) contained in the target route indication information is different from its own address (add.UE4), and the target route indication information of the second data packet is the default route When the indication information add.xxx (that is, it is determined that the target routing indication information of the second data packet contains a default address), it can be determined that the second data packet is a data packet in the upstream transmission direction, that is, it is determined that the transmission object is the next data packet in the upstream direction. Hop - AN device.
  • the UE4 may determine the transmission direction and the transmission object through the interface for receiving the second data packet.
  • the UE4 may determine the first The second data packet is the data packet in the upstream transmission direction, that is, it is determined that the transmission object is the next hop in the upstream direction - the AN device.
  • the AN device After receiving the second data packet, the AN device decapsulates the second data packet to obtain the first data packet without the BAP header.
  • the AN device may perform subsequent processing according to the data carried in the first data packet, such as starting a process of establishing a Uu communication connection between the AN device and the UE1.
  • S207 The AN device establishes a Uu communication connection with the UE1.
  • the AN device determines the uplink dedicated routing indication information (hereinafter referred to as UL routing indication information-UE1) and the downlink dedicated routing indication information (hereinafter referred to as DL routing indication information-UE1) of the UE1, and sends the UL routing indication information-UE1 / Configure it to UE2, so that UE2 can use the UL routing indication information-UE1 to implement uplink transmission of UE1.
  • UL routing indication information-UE1 uplink dedicated routing indication information
  • DL routing indication information-UE1 downlink dedicated routing indication information
  • the AN device sends the uplink dedicated routing indication information (UL routing indication information-UE1) of the UE1 to the UE2 through S208. Further, in order to realize downlink transmission of UE1, the AN device saves downlink dedicated routing indication information (DL routing indication information-UE1) of UE1.
  • UL routing indication information-UE1 uplink dedicated routing indication information
  • DL routing indication information-UE1 downlink dedicated routing indication information
  • the UL routing indication information-UE1 includes the address of the destination relay UE in the uplink transmission direction (the last relay UE in the uplink transmission direction).
  • the UL routing indication information-UE1 includes the address add.UE4 of the UE4.
  • the DL routing indication information-UE1 includes the address of the destination relay UE in the downlink transmission direction (the last relay UE in the downlink transmission direction). In this embodiment of the present application, the DL routing indication information-UE1 includes the address add.UE2 of UE2.
  • the quantity of uplink dedicated routing indication information of UE1 may be one, and the downlink dedicated routing indication information of UE1 may also be one.
  • the AN device may determine the uplink dedicated routing indication information (including multiple UL routing indication information-UE1) and/or the downlink dedicated routing indication information (including multiple DL routing indications) with the bearer as the granularity info-UE1). Different UL routing indication information-UE1/DL routing indication information-UE1 has a corresponding relationship with different bearers.
  • each device in the above-mentioned link 1 may utilize the UL routing indication information-UE1 and the DL routing indication information-UE1 to implement uplink transmission and downlink transmission of UE1.
  • S209-S213 correspond to the uplink transmission process of UE1
  • S214-S217 correspond to the downlink transmission process of UE1. It should be noted that this application does not limit the execution order of the uplink transmission process and the downlink transmission process.
  • the uplink transmission process of the UE1 is first described below.
  • UE1 generates a third data packet, wherein the third data packet does not have a BAP header.
  • the third data packet may carry user plane data or control plane data (eg, signaling) of the UE1, which is not limited in this application.
  • UE1 sends the third data packet to UE2, and UE2 receives the third data packet from UE1.
  • UE2 uses the uplink dedicated routing indication information (UL routing indication information-UE1, including add.UE4) of UE1 as the target routing indication information of the third data packet; when UE2 determines the target routing indication information
  • UL routing indication information-UE1, including add.UE4 of UE1
  • the target routing indication information determines the target routing information (for example, item 1 in Table 1) that includes the target routing indication information, Determine the next-hop node address (ie add.UE3) corresponding to the target routing information in the target routing information, and determine that the transmission object is the next-hop node indicated by the next-hop node address (ie, add.UE3 indicated UE3).
  • UE2 determines that the local identifier of the target device of the third data packet is the local identifier of the source device of the third data packet (that is, the local identifier of UE1: LID-UE1), and adds BAP to the third data packet header to generate a fourth data packet, wherein the BAP header of the fourth data packet includes target routing indication information add.UE4 and the local identifier LID-UE1 of the target device.
  • UE2 sends a fourth data packet to UE3.
  • UE3 receives the fourth data packet from UE2.
  • UE2 determines the target routing indication of the third data packet when information, including the following steps:
  • UE2 determines the target bearer used for transmitting the third data packet
  • the UE2 determines that the target routing indication information is: among the multiple UL routing indication information-UE1, the target UL routing indication information-UE1 that has a corresponding relationship with the target bearer.
  • UE3 After receiving the fourth data packet, UE3 obtains the target routing indication information of the fourth data packet (ie, UL routing indication information-UE1-add.UE4) from the BAP header of the fourth data packet; when determining the target routing indication When the destination address (add.UE4) contained in the information is different from its own address (add.UE3), at least one of the stored routing information determines the destination routing information containing the destination routing indication information (for example, item 1 in Table 2) , in the target routing information, determine the next hop node address (ie add.UE4) corresponding to the target routing indication information, and determine that the transmission object is the next hop node indicated by the next hop node address (ie, add.UE4 indicated UE4).
  • UE3 sends a fourth data packet to UE4.
  • UE4 receives the fourth data packet from UE3.
  • the UE4 serving as the header relay UE can obtain the target routing indication information of the fourth data packet from the BAP header of the fourth data packet (that is, the UL routing indication information-UE1-add. UE4).
  • the target routing indication information that is, the UL routing indication information-UE1-add. UE4.
  • UE4 determines that the destination address (add.UE4) contained in the target routing indication information is the same as its own address (add.UE4), and the interface used to receive the second data packet is the PC5 interface, it can determine that the second data packet is an uplink
  • the transmission object is determined to be the next hop in the upstream direction - the AN device.
  • UE4 sends a fourth data packet to the AN device.
  • the AN device receives the fourth data packet from UE4.
  • the AN device After receiving the fourth data packet, the AN device decapsulates the fourth data packet to obtain a third data packet without a BAP header.
  • the AN device may perform subsequent processing according to the data (eg, user plane data or control plane data) carried in the third data packet, for example, send the user plane data to the core network device, or perform corresponding operations according to the control plane data.
  • the AN device obtains a fifth data packet, where the fifth data packet does not have a BAP header.
  • the fifth data packet may carry user plane data or control plane data (eg, signaling) of the UE1, which is not limited in this application.
  • the fifth data packet may be generated by the AN device itself, or may be received from the core network device.
  • the AN device takes the stored downlink dedicated routing indication information of UE1 (DL routing indication information-UE1, including add.UE2) as the target routing indication information of the fifth data packet, and determines that the target device local identifier of the fifth data packet is the fifth data packet.
  • the local identity of the destination device (UE1) of the data packet that is, the local identity of UE1: LID-UE1).
  • the AN device adds a BAP header to the fifth data packet to generate a sixth data packet, wherein the BAP header of the sixth data packet includes the target routing indication information add.UE2 and the target device local identifier LID-UE1.
  • the AN device sends the sixth data packet to UE4.
  • UE4 receives the sixth data packet from the AN device.
  • the AN device may, but is not limited to, determine that the transmission object is UE4 through the following implementations:
  • the AN device may determine the head relay UE—UE4 in the communication link where the UE1 is located according to the topology relationship of the communication system.
  • the AN device may also determine the header relay UE (ie DL routing indication information-UE1) corresponding to the downlink dedicated routing indication information of UE1 Routing indication information - UE1 corresponds to UE4). In this way, when determining that the target route indication information of the fifth data packet is the DL route indication information-UE1, the AN device may further determine that the transmission object is the UE4 corresponding to the DL route indication information-UE1.
  • the AN device may maintain at least one piece of routing information (both are downlink routing information), so that after determining the downlink dedicated routing indication information (DL routing indication information-UE1) of UE1 in S208, it can generate A piece of routing information is as follows:
  • Routing indication information add.UE2, next-hop node address: add.UE4.
  • the AN device determines the target routing indication information of the fifth data packet. , including the following steps:
  • the AN device determines the target bearer used for transmitting the fifth data packet
  • the AN device determines that the target routing indication information is: among the multiple DL routing indication information-UE1, the target DL routing indication information-UE1 that has a corresponding relationship with the target bearer.
  • UE4 serving as the header relay UE can obtain the target routing indication information of the sixth data packet from the BAP header of the sixth data packet (ie, DL routing indication information-UE1, including add. UE2).
  • the target routing information for example, Table 3 that contains the target routing indication information. Item 1), determine the next hop node address (ie add.UE3) corresponding to the target routing indication information in the target routing information, and determine that the transmission object is the next hop node indicated by the next hop node address. (ie UE3 indicated by add.UE3).
  • UE4 sends the sixth data packet to UE3.
  • UE3 receives the sixth data packet from UE4.
  • UE3 After receiving the sixth data packet, UE3 obtains the target routing indication information (ie, DL routing indication information-UE1-add.UE2) of the sixth data packet from the BAP header of the sixth data packet; when determining the target routing indication When the destination address (add.UE2) contained in the information is different from its own address (add.UE3), at least one stored routing information determines the destination routing information containing the destination routing indication information (for example, item 3 in Table 2) , in the target routing information, determine the next hop node address (ie add.UE2) corresponding to the target routing indication information, and determine that the transmission object is the next hop node indicated by the next hop node address (ie, add.UE2 indicated UE2). UE3 sends the sixth data packet to UE2, and UE2 receives the sixth data packet from UE3.
  • the target routing indication information ie, DL routing indication information-UE1-add.UE2
  • the target routing indication information for example, item 3 in Table 2
  • UE2 serving as the end relay UE can obtain the target routing indication information of the sixth data packet from the BAP header of the sixth data packet (ie, DL routing indication information-UE1-add. UE2); when the UE determines that the destination address (add.UE2) contained in the target routing indication information is the same as its own address (add.UE2), obtains the target device local identifier of the sixth data packet from the BAP header of the sixth data packet (LID-UE1), and determine that the transmission object is the remote UE indicated by the local identity of the target device (ie, the UE1 indicated by the LID UE1).
  • UE2 decapsulates the sixth data packet to obtain the fifth data packet without the BAP header.
  • UE2 sends the fifth data packet to UE1, and UE1 receives the fifth data packet from UE2.
  • UE1 may perform subsequent processing according to the data carried in the fifth data packet.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a routing method, which can use the address of the relay UE as routing indication information to guide the routing transmission of data packets, so as to implement routing between an AN device and a remote UE in a multi-hop communication scenario .
  • routing transmission in a single-hop communication scenario can also be implemented.
  • the following takes the communication link of the UE5-UE4-AN device (referred to as link 2) as an example, and the description is made with reference to the flowchart shown in FIG. 4 .
  • S401 UE5 establishes an SL communication connection with UE4, and UE4 allocates a local identity (LID-UE5) to UE5.
  • LID-UE5 a local identity
  • the UE5 In order to establish the Uu communication connection between the UE5 and the AN device, the UE5 generates a seventh data packet, where the seventh data packet includes the first message sent by the UE5 to the network side. UE5 sends a seventh data packet to UE4, wherein the seventh data packet does not have a BAP header. UE4 receives the seventh data packet from UE5.
  • UE4 takes the default route indication information (add.xxx) as the target route indication information of the seven data packets; when When the UE4 determines that the destination address (add.xxx) contained in the target routing indication information is different from its own address (add.UE4), it determines that the transmission object is the AN device according to the target routing indication information.
  • UE4 determines that the local identifier of the target device of the seventh data packet is the local identifier of the source device of the seventh data packet (that is, the local identifier of UE5: LID-UE5), and adds BAP to the seventh data packet header to generate an eighth data packet, wherein the BAP header of the eighth data packet includes target routing indication information and a local identifier of the target device.
  • UE4 sends the eighth data packet to the AN device.
  • the AN device receives the eighth data packet from UE4.
  • the UE4 when the UE4 determines that the target route indication information is the default route indication information, it can determine that the seventh data packet is a data packet in the uplink transmission direction, that is, determine that the transmission object is the next hop in the uplink direction—an equipment Or when UE4 determines that the interface used for receiving the seventh data packet is the PC5 interface, it can determine that the seventh data packet is a data packet in the uplink transmission direction, that is, determine that the transmission object is the next hop in the uplink direction—AN equipment.
  • the AN device decapsulates the eighth data packet to obtain the seventh data packet without the BAP header.
  • the AN device may perform post-processing according to the data carried in the seventh data packet, for example, start a process of establishing a Uu communication connection between the AN device and the UE5.
  • S405 The AN device establishes a Uu communication connection with the UE5.
  • the AN device determines the uplink dedicated routing indication information (hereinafter referred to as UL routing indication information-UE5) and the downlink dedicated routing indication information (hereinafter referred to as DL routing indication information-UE5) of the UE5, and sends the UL routing indication information-UE5 /Configure to UE4, so that UE5 can use UL routing indication information-UE5 to realize uplink transmission of UE5.
  • UL routing indication information-UE5 uplink dedicated routing indication information
  • DL routing indication information-UE5 downlink dedicated routing indication information
  • the UL routing indication information-UE5 includes the address add.UE4 of the UE4; the DL routing indication information-UE5 includes the address add.UE4 of the UE4.
  • the quantity of uplink dedicated routing indication information of the UE5 may be one, and the downlink dedicated routing indication information of the UE5 may also be one.
  • the AN device may determine the uplink dedicated routing indication information (including multiple UL routing indication information—UE5) and/or the downlink dedicated routing indication information (including multiple DL routing indications) with the bearer as the granularity info-UE5).
  • Different UL routing indication information-UE5/DL routing indication information-UE5 has a corresponding relationship with different bearers.
  • each device in the above-mentioned link 2 can use the UL routing indication information-UE5 and the DL routing indication information-UE5 to implement the uplink transmission and the downlink transmission of the UE5.
  • S407-S409 correspond to the uplink transmission process
  • S410-S411 correspond to the downlink transmission process.
  • the uplink transmission process of the UE5 is first described below.
  • the UE5 generates a ninth data packet, wherein the ninth data packet does not have a BAP header.
  • the ninth data packet may carry user plane data or control plane data of the UE5, which is not limited in this application.
  • UE5 sends the ninth data packet to UE4, and UE4 receives the ninth data packet from UE5.
  • the UE4 serving as the tail relay UE and the head relay UE uses the uplink dedicated routing indication information (UL routing indication information-UE5, including add.UE4) of the UE5 as the target of the ninth data packet Routing instructions.
  • UL routing indication information-UE5, including add.UE4 the uplink dedicated routing indication information of the UE5 as the target of the ninth data packet Routing instructions.
  • UE4 determines that the destination address (add.UE4) contained in the target routing indication information is the same as its own address (add.UE4), and the interface used to receive the ninth data packet is the PC5 interface, it can determine that the ninth data packet is uplink transmission
  • the data packet in the direction, that is, the transmission object is determined as the next hop in the upstream direction - the AN device.
  • UE4 determines that the local identifier of the target device of the ninth data packet is the local identifier of the source device of the ninth data packet (that is, the local identifier of UE5: LID-UE5), and adds BAP to the ninth data packet header, generating a tenth data packet, wherein the BAP header of the tenth data packet includes target routing indication information and a local identifier of the target device.
  • UE4 sends the tenth data packet to the AN device.
  • the AN device receives the tenth data packet from UE4.
  • the uplink dedicated route indication information of UE5 saved by UE4 includes multiple UL route indication information that has a corresponding relationship with different bearers-UE5
  • UE4 determines the target route indication information of the ninth data packet which includes the following steps:
  • UE4 determines the target bearer used for transmitting the ninth data packet
  • the UE2 determines that the target routing indication information is: among the multiple UL routing indication information-UE5, the target UL routing indication information-UE5 that has a corresponding relationship with the target bearer.
  • the AN device After receiving the tenth data packet, the AN device decapsulates the tenth data packet to obtain a ninth data packet without a BAP header.
  • the AN device may perform subsequent processing according to the data carried in the ninth data packet (eg, user plane data or control plane data), such as sending user plane data to the core network device, or performing corresponding operations according to the control plane data.
  • the downlink transmission process of the UE5 will be described below.
  • the AN device obtains an eleventh data packet, where the eleventh data packet does not have a BAP header.
  • the eleventh data packet may carry user plane data or control plane data of the UE5.
  • the AN device takes the stored downlink dedicated routing indication information of UE5 (DL routing indication information-UE5, including add.UE4) as the target routing indication information of the eleventh data packet, and determines that the local identification of the target device of the eleventh data packet is The local identifier of the destination device (UE5) of the eleventh data packet (ie, the local identifier LID-UE5 of the UE5).
  • the AN device adds a BAP header to the eleventh data packet to generate a twelfth data packet, wherein the BAP header of the twelfth data packet includes target routing indication information add.UE4 and target device local identifier LID-UE5.
  • the AN device sends the twelfth data packet to UE4.
  • UE4 receives the twelfth data packet from the AN device.
  • the AN device may determine that the transmission object is UE4 according to the topology relationship of the communication system, or according to the DL routing indication information - the corresponding relationship between UE5 and UE4.
  • the UE4 serving as the header relay UE can obtain the target routing indication information of the twelfth data packet from the BAP header of the twelfth data packet (ie, the DL routing indication information-UE5, contains add.UE4).
  • the target routing indication information ie, the DL routing indication information-UE5, contains add.UE4.
  • UE4 determines that the destination address (add.UE4) contained in the target routing indication information is the same as its own address (add.UE4), and the interface used to receive the twelfth data packet is the Uu interface, it can determine that the twelfth data packet It is a data packet in the downlink transmission direction, that is, it is determined that the transmission object is the next hop in the downlink direction—the remote UE of UE4.
  • UE4 can obtain the local identification of the target device (LID-UE5) of the twelfth data packet from the BAP header of the twelfth data packet, and determine that the transmission object is the remote UE indicated by the local identification of the target device (that is, indicated by the LID UE5). of UE5).
  • UE4 decapsulates the twelfth data packet to obtain the eleventh data packet without the BAP header.
  • UE4 sends the eleventh data packet to UE5, and UE5 receives the eleventh data packet from UE4.
  • the UE5 may perform subsequent processing according to the data carried in the eleventh data packet.
  • this embodiment provides a routing mechanism 1, and the mechanism 1 includes:
  • the target route indication information is the downlink dedicated route indication information of the remote UE (including the destination address, that is, the address of the destination relay UE), and the local identifier of the target device is the local identifier of the remote UE.
  • any relay UE After receiving the data packet 2, any relay UE first determines whether the destination address included in the target routing indication information is the same as its own address;
  • the remote UE indicated by the local identifier of the target device is determined within the scope of the relay UE, and the data packet 2 is to be decapsulated. Afterwards, send the data packet 1 obtained by decapsulation to the remote UE;
  • the difference is that after receiving the data packet 1 without the BAP header sent by the remote UE, the relay UE determines the target routing indication information and the local identifier of the target device in the data packet 1.
  • the target route indication information is the uplink dedicated route indication information of the remote UE (including the destination address, that is, the address of the destination relay UE) or the default route indication information, and the local identifier of the target device is the local identifier of the remote UE.
  • the relay UE adds a BAP header to the data packet 1 to generate the data packet 2 . Then, the transmission object is determined according to the above working mechanism, and the data packet 2 is sent.
  • the head relay UE since the head relay UE is connected with the AN device through the Uu interface, and is connected with other relay UEs through the PC5 interface. Therefore, when the AN device does not configure uplink routing information for the head relay UE, the head relay UE can determine the subsequent action in combination with the interface.
  • the header relay UE After the header relay UE receives the data packet 2, it is determined that the destination address contained in the target routing indication information in the BAP header of the data packet 2 is the same as its own address, and then the interface used to receive the data packet 2 is judged; if the interface is Uu If the interface is the PC5 interface, the transmission object is further determined by the local identification of the target device of the data packet 2; if the interface is the PC5 interface, the AN device is determined as the transmission object.
  • the data packet sent by the remote UE to the relay UE may not carry the BAP header.
  • the data packet sent by UE1 to UE2 in the figure does not carry the BAP header, while the data packet sent by UE2 to UE3 The sent data packet needs to carry the BAP header.
  • the relay UE itself may also communicate with the AN device as a remote UE.
  • the UE2-UE3-UE4-AN device is a communication link (referred to as link 3).
  • link 3 UE2 is a remote UE
  • UE3 is a tail relay UE
  • UE4 is a head relay UE.
  • UE2 which is a remote UE, can also perform uplink transmission and downlink transmission through the above process.
  • the data packet sent by UE2, which is the remote UE, to UE3 does not need to carry the BAP header.
  • UE3 sends data packets to UE2 without BAP header (when UE2 is the remote UE, such as the scenario of link 3 above), in other cases UE3 sends UE2 to UE2
  • the sent data packet carries a BAP header (when UE2 is a relay UE, such as the scenario of the above link 1).
  • UE3 cannot determine which method should be used to parse the received data packets. To parse the packet format of the header, or parse it according to the format that does not carry the BAP header.
  • a logical channel used by a UE as a remote UE to communicate with a relay UE is different from a logical channel used by the UE as a relay UE to communicate with an adjacent relay UE.
  • the data packet when a UE serving as a relay UE in another link sends a data packet to an adjacent relay UE as a remote UE in another link, the data packet carries a BAP header.
  • the BAP header also carries the target routing indication information and the local identifier of the target device.
  • the local identifier of the target device is the default local identifier, which is used to indicate itself. For example, the default local ID is LID-000.
  • the UE After the UE receives a data packet, if the destination address included in the target routing indication information in the data packet is the same as its own address, and the target device local identifier in the data packet is the default local identifier, then Identify the packet as own.
  • the UE will parse the data packet, obtain a data packet that does not contain a BAP header, and submit it to its own upper layer (eg, the PDCP layer).
  • the AN device also needs to configure its uplink dedicated routing indication information (including in the header of the link where the relay UE is located) to each relay UE in each communication system. address of the relay UE), and send the uplink dedicated route indication information to the corresponding relay UE, so that the relay UE can perform uplink transmission of the relay UE according to the uplink dedicated route indication information.
  • the head relay UE can also implement the uplink and downlink transmission of its own data packets through the above method.
  • the addresses included in the uplink dedicated route indication information and the downlink dedicated route indication information allocated by the AN device are both addresses of the relay UE in the header.
  • the header relay UE determines that its own local identity is the above-mentioned default local identity (for example, LID-000). After receiving a data packet, the header relay UE determines that the destination address contained in the target routing indication information in the data packet is the same as its own address, the interface for receiving the data packet is the Uu interface, and the target device in the data packet is the same. If the local ID is the default local ID, the data packet is determined to be its own.
  • the address assigned by the AN device to each UE the address assigned by the AN device to each UE, and the BAP header in the data packet when the AN device sends each UE as the destination device
  • the content, etc. can be referred to as shown in Figure 6.
  • Embodiment 2 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 1:
  • this embodiment of the present application further provides another routing method.
  • the address of the relay UE or the address of the AN device is used as routing indication information to guide the routing transmission of the data packet.
  • the method provided by the embodiment of the present application can also be applied to the flow chart of the routing method shown in FIG. 2 . Therefore, the following continues to take link 1 as an example, and with reference to FIG. 2 , the method provided by the embodiment of the present application is performed Detailed description.
  • the AN device configures an address and at least one piece of routing information for each relay UE in the communication system, and sends default routing indication information to each relay UE.
  • This step is similar to the corresponding step in the first embodiment, the difference is:
  • the AN device itself is also configured with an address (hereinafter referred to as add.AN).
  • the AN device can send its own address to the head relay UE in each link, so that the head relay UE can subsequently determine the AN device indicated by the address of the AN device, so as to determine the transmission object, and then realize the transmission to the AN device. Packet transmission.
  • add.AN may be a default AN address, or may be allocated by the AN device for itself, or configured by a user, which is not limited in this application.
  • the AN device sends the default route indication information to each relay UE.
  • the default route indication information is specified by the communication protocol or preset inside the relay UE. In this case, the AN device may not need to send the default route indication information to each relay UE.
  • the at least one routing information configured by the AN device for each relay UE is different from that in the first embodiment.
  • the AN device Since the AN device has an address, for uplink transmission, the next hop node of the head relay UE in each link is the AN device. Therefore, the AN device can configure uplink routing information for each relay UE, and the uplink routing information is different from that in the first embodiment. (It should be noted that the downlink routing information configured by the AN device for each relay UE in this embodiment is the same as that in Embodiment 1).
  • the routing information provided by the AN device for UE2, UE3, and UE4 can be referred to as shown in Tables 4-6.
  • Tables 4 to 6 the default address add.xxx included in the default route indication information is different from the address add.AN of the AN device as an example.
  • Table 4 Routing information for UE2
  • the two routing information are uplink routing information.
  • Table 5 Routing information for UE3
  • the first and second pieces of routing information are uplink routing information
  • the third piece is downlink routing information
  • Table 6 Routing information for UE4
  • the first and second pieces of routing information are uplink routing information
  • the third and fourth pieces are downlink routing information.
  • S201 UE1 establishes an SL communication connection with UE2, and UE2 allocates a local identifier (hereinafter referred to as LID-UE1) to UE1.
  • LID-UE1 a local identifier
  • the UE1 In order to establish the Uu communication connection between the UE1 and the AN device, the UE1 generates a first data packet, and the first data packet includes the first message sent by the UE1 to the network side, wherein the first data packet does not have a BAP header .
  • UE1 sends the first data packet to UE2.
  • UE2 receives the first data packet from UE1.
  • UE2 takes the default route indication information (ie add.xxx) as the target route indication information of the first data packet ;
  • the target routing information such as the table that contains the target routing indication information
  • the next hop node address ie add.UE3 corresponding to the target routing indication information in the target routing information, and determine that the transmission object is the next hop node indicated by the next hop node address ( That is, UE3 indicated by add.UE3).
  • UE2 determines that the local identifier of the target device of the first data packet is the local identifier of the source device of the first data packet (that is, the local identifier of UE1: LID-UE1); and adds BAP to the first data packet header, to generate a second data packet, wherein the BAP header of the second data packet includes the target routing indication information add.xxx and the local identification LID-UE1 of the target device.
  • UE2 sends the second data packet to UE3.
  • UE3 receives the second data packet from UE2.
  • two adjacent relay UEs Similar to Embodiment 1, in order to implement the routing function, two adjacent relay UEs also need to obtain the address of each other, so that during the routing transmission process, the relay UE can accurately Determine the transport object indicated by the next-hop node address.
  • the relay UE can accurately Determine the transport object indicated by the next-hop node address.
  • the UE3 After receiving the second data packet, the UE3 obtains the target routing indication information (that is, the default routing indication information add.xxx) of the second data packet from the BAP header of the second data packet; when determining the purpose included in the target routing indication information
  • the address (add.xxx) is different from its own address (add.UE3)
  • at least one of the stored routing information determines the target routing information (for example, item 2 in Table 5) that contains the target routing indication information.
  • the routing information determine the address of the next hop node corresponding to the target routing indication information (ie add.UE4), and determine that the transmission object is the next hop node indicated by the address of the next hop node (ie, UE4 indicated by add.UE4) .
  • UE3 sends the second data packet to UE4.
  • UE4 receives the second data packet from UE3.
  • UE4 After receiving the second data packet, UE4 can obtain the target routing indication information of the second data packet (that is, the default routing indication information add.xxx) from the BAP header of the second data packet; when UE4 determines the target routing indication information When the included destination address (add.xxx) is different from its own address (add.UE4), at least one of the stored routing information determines the destination routing information (for example, item 2 in Table 6) that includes the destination routing indication information, In the target routing information, determine the address of the next hop node corresponding to the target routing indication information (ie add.AN), and determine that the transmission object is the next hop node indicated by the address of the next hop node (ie, indicated by add.AN) AN equipment). UE4 sends the second data packet to the AN device. The AN device receives the second data packet from UE4.
  • the target routing indication information of the second data packet that is, the default routing indication information add.xxx
  • S206-S208 are the same as the corresponding steps in Embodiment 1, and the specific processes can be referred to each other, which will not be repeated here. That is, after establishing a Uu communication connection with UE1, the AN device determines the uplink dedicated routing information (hereinafter referred to as UL routing information-UE1) and downlink dedicated routing information (hereinafter referred to as DL routing information-UE1) of UE1, and The UL routing indication information-UE1 is configured to UE2, so that UE2 can use the UL routing indication information-UE1 to realize uplink transmission of UE1.
  • UL routing information-UE1 uplink dedicated routing information
  • DL routing information-UE1 downlink dedicated routing information
  • the UL routing indication information-UE1 is configured to UE2, so that UE2 can use the UL routing indication information-UE1 to realize uplink transmission of UE1.
  • the UL routing indication information-UE1 contains the address of the destination device in the uplink transmission direction. Since the destination device is an AN device in this case, the UL routing indication information-UE1 contains add.AN.
  • the DL routing indication information-UE1 includes the address of the destination relay UE in the downlink transmission direction (the last relay UE in the downlink transmission direction).
  • the DL routing indication information-UE1 includes the address add.UE2 of UE2.
  • each device in the above-mentioned link 1 can use the UL routing indication information-UE1 and the DL routing indication information-UE1 to implement uplink transmission and downlink transmission of UE1.
  • S209-S213 correspond to the uplink transmission process of UE1
  • S214-S217 correspond to the downlink transmission process of UE1.
  • each device in link 1 can use the same process as that of the first embodiment, according to the DL routing indication information-UE1 Realize the downlink transmission process. Based on this, the downlink transmission process of S214-S217 is not repeated in this embodiment of the present application, and the specific process may refer to the description in the first embodiment above.
  • the following describes in detail how each device in link 1 implements uplink transmission processes S209-S213 according to the UL routing indication information-UE1.
  • S209 UE1 generates a third data packet, wherein the third data packet does not have a BAP header.
  • UE1 sends the third data packet to UE2, and UE2 receives the third data packet from UE1.
  • UE2 uses the uplink dedicated routing indication information (UL routing indication information-UE1, including add.AN) of UE1 as the target routing indication information of the third data packet; when UE2 determines the target routing indication information
  • UL routing indication information-UE1, including add.AN the uplink dedicated routing indication information of UE1
  • add.AN the included destination address
  • add.UE2 determines the target routing indication information
  • the target routing information for example, item 1 in Table 4
  • UE2 determines that the local identifier of the target device of the third data packet is the local identifier of the source device of the third data packet (that is, the local identifier of UE1: LID-UE1), and adds BAP to the third data packet header, to generate a fourth data packet, wherein the BAP header of the fourth data packet includes target routing indication information add.UE4 and the local identifier LID-UE1 of the target device.
  • UE2 sends a fourth data packet to UE3.
  • UE3 receives the fourth data packet from UE2.
  • UE2 determines the target routing indication of the third data packet when information, including the following steps:
  • UE2 determines the target bearer used for transmitting the third data packet
  • the UE2 determines that the target routing indication information is: among the multiple UL routing indication information-UE1, the target UL routing indication information-UE1 that has a corresponding relationship with the target bearer.
  • UE3 After receiving the fourth data packet, UE3 obtains the target routing indication information (ie, UL routing indication information-UE1-add.AN) of the fourth data packet from the BAP header of the fourth data packet; when determining the target routing indication
  • the target routing indication information ie, UL routing indication information-UE1-add.AN
  • at least one stored routing information determines the destination routing information containing the destination routing indication information (for example, item 1 in Table 5) , determine the next-hop node address (ie add.UE4) corresponding to the target routing indication information in the target routing information, and determine that the transmission object is the next-hop node indicated by the next-hop node address (ie, add.UE4 indicated UE4).
  • UE3 sends a fourth data packet to UE4.
  • UE4 receives the fourth data packet from UE3.
  • the UE4 may obtain the target routing indication information (ie, UL routing indication information-UE1-add.AN) of the fourth data packet from the BAP header of the fourth data packet.
  • the target routing indication information ie, UL routing indication information-UE1-add.AN
  • the target routing information for example, Table 6 that contains the target routing indication information. Item 1), determine the next hop node address (ie add.AN) corresponding to the target routing indication information in the target routing information, and determine that the transmission object is the next hop node indicated by the next hop node address. (ie the AN device indicated by add.AN).
  • UE4 sends a fourth data packet to the AN device.
  • the AN device receives the fourth data packet from UE4.
  • the AN device After receiving the fourth data packet, the AN device decapsulates the fourth data packet to obtain a third data packet without a BAP header.
  • the AN device may perform subsequent processing according to the data (eg, user plane data or control plane data) carried in the third data packet, for example, send the user plane data to the core network device, or perform corresponding operations according to the control plane data.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a routing method, which can use the address of the relay UE or the address of the AN device as routing indication information to guide the routing transmission of data packets, so as to realize the AN device and the remote end in a multi-hop communication scenario Routing between UEs.
  • route transmission in a single-hop communication scenario can also be implemented.
  • the device can use the same method as the above to realize the uplink transmission and downlink transmission of the UE5, and the specific process can refer to the description in the above embodiment, which will not be repeated this time.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a routing mechanism 2, and the mechanism 2 includes:
  • the downstream direction is the same as Mechanism 1.
  • the difference is that after receiving the data packet 1 without the BAP header sent by the remote UE, the relay UE determines the target routing indication information and the local identifier of the target device in the data packet 1.
  • the target route indication information is the uplink dedicated route indication information of the remote UE (including the destination address, that is, the address of the AN device) or the default route indication information, and the local identifier of the target device is the local identifier of the remote UE.
  • the relay UE adds a BAP header to the data packet 1 to generate the data packet 2 . Then, the transmission object is determined according to the above working mechanism, and the data packet 2 is sent until the data packet 2 is transmitted to the AN device.
  • the entire set of protocol stacks finally formed may be as shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the relay UE itself communicates with the AN device as the remote UE, for example, when the UE2 in the link 3 mentioned in the first embodiment is used as the remote UE, the two methods in the above embodiment 1 can also be used.
  • the specific process can refer to the description of the corresponding process in the first embodiment, which will not be repeated here.
  • the address assigned by the AN device to each UE, the BAP header in the data packet when the AN device uses each UE as the destination device to send the data packet For the content, etc., please refer to Figure 7.
  • the embodiments of the present application further provide another routing method.
  • the address of the device and the path ID are used together as routing indication information to guide the routing transmission of data packets.
  • the AN device can assign a path ID to each communication link.
  • the AN device can assign a path ID to each communication link according to the topological relationship of the communication system.
  • the path ID assigned by the AN device to each link can distinguish the transmission direction, that is, for the same communication link, the AN device allocates a path ID for the uplink transmission direction of the link, and assigns a path ID for the downlink transmission direction of the link.
  • a path ID is assigned to the transmission direction; or the AN device does not distinguish the transmission direction when assigning a path ID, that is, a path ID is assigned to a communication link.
  • the following is an example in which the AN device assigns a path ID to each communication link regardless of the transmission direction.
  • the AN device also allocates path ID-1 for the following communication links: UE4-AN device, UE3-UE4-AN device, UE5-UE4-AN device; for the communication link UE7- AN device assigns path ID-2; assigns path ID-3 for the following communication links: UE8-AN device, UE9-UE8-AN device, UE11-UE8-AN device; AN device assigns path ID-4 for the following communication links : UE2-UE3-UE4-AN device, UE6-UE3-UE4-AN device; AN device allocates path ID-5 for the communication link UE1-UE2-UE3-UE4-AN device; AN device is the communication link UE10-UE9 -UE8-AN device assigns path ID-6.
  • the path ID-yyy assigned by the AN device for the default route indication information.
  • the routing information allocated by the AN device to the relay UE in link 1 is shown in Table 7-Table 9.
  • Table 7 Routing information for UE2
  • the two pieces of routing information are both uplink routing information.
  • Table 8 Routing information for UE3
  • the first to third pieces of routing information are uplink routing information
  • the fourth item is downlink routing information
  • Table 9 Routing information for UE4
  • the two pieces of routing information are both downlink routing information.
  • the AN device allocates uplink dedicated route indication information and downlink dedicated route indication information to the remote UE.
  • the routing indication information not only includes the corresponding address but also needs to include the path ID allocated by the AN device for the communication link where the remote UE is located.
  • the routing mechanism 3 provided in this embodiment of the present application, reference may be made to the mechanism 1 provided in the first embodiment or the mechanism 2 provided in the second embodiment. For details, reference may be made to the detailed description of the mechanism 1 or the mechanism 2 above, which will not be repeated here. It is worth noting that in the mechanism 3, the path identifier and the address of the device in the routing indication information included in the target routing information found by the relay UE are the same as the target path identifier and destination address of the target routing indication information, respectively.
  • the content in the BAP header of the data packet can be referred to as shown in FIG. 8 .
  • Embodiment 4 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 4:
  • the method provided in this embodiment uses the address of the UE as the routing indication information to guide the routing transmission of the data packet.
  • the method provided by this embodiment will be described in detail below with reference to the flowchart of the routing method shown in FIG. 9 .
  • the AN device does not have the above address used for routing.
  • the BAP header of the data packet not only includes target routing indication information but also includes the local identifier of the target device. The difference between this embodiment and the above embodiment is that, The BAP header of the data packet contains the target routing information, and does not need to contain the local identifier of the target device.
  • the AN device configures an address and at least one piece of routing information for each UE in the communication system.
  • the AN device will allocate an address to each UE, which is used to uniquely identify each relay UE within the coverage of the AN device or in a cell managed by the AN device.
  • the AN device configures an address for a UE, it also configures new routing information for the relay UE in the link where the UE is located, and the routing indication information in the updated routing information includes the address of the UE.
  • the relay UEs may perform downlink transmission of the UEs according to the updated routing information.
  • the at least one routing information provided by the AN device for each relay UE includes downlink routing information and uplink routing information. distinguish. Any piece of routing information includes a routing indication information and the address of the next hop node corresponding to the routing indication information.
  • the routing indication information includes a destination address, and the destination address included in the routing indication information of the uplink routing information can be understood as the address of the destination relay UE.
  • the destination address included in the routing indication information of the downlink routing information may be the address of the destination device (the remote UE in the link).
  • the AN device itself does not have an address configured, but can configure an address for the remote UE in the link. Therefore, for downlink transmission, the last relay UE in each link has the next link. hop node, so the AN device will allocate downlink routing information to it. The difference is that for uplink transmission, the head relay UE in each link also has no next-hop node, so the AN device will not allocate corresponding uplink routing information to it.
  • a default route indication information is also introduced in the embodiment of the present application.
  • the default route indication information is used to transmit the first data packet of the remote UE newly accessing the system to the AN device. Subsequent embodiments of the present application will be described by taking the default route indication information including add.xxx as an example.
  • routing information including the default route indication information in the routing information configured by the AN device for the UE that has accessed the system.
  • the uplink routing information including the default routing indication information configured by the AN device for UE2 and UE3 is shown in Table 10 and Table 11 respectively:
  • Table 10 Routing information for UE2
  • Table 11 Routing information for UE3
  • S901 UE1 establishes an SL communication connection with UE2.
  • the UE1 In order to establish the Uu communication connection between the UE1 and the AN device, the UE1 generates a first data packet, and the first data packet includes the first message sent by the UE1 to the network side.
  • the first data packet includes the RRC Connection establishment request.
  • UE1 uses the default route indication information (including add.xxx) as the target route indication information of the first data packet, and adds a BAP header to the first data packet to generate a second data packet, wherein the BAP header of the second data packet contains the target Routing instructions (add.xxx).
  • UE1 sends the second data packet to UE2.
  • UE2 receives the second data packet from UE1.
  • UE1 can determine the default route indication information through the following two implementations:
  • Embodiment 1 The default route indication information may be predefined and stored in the UE.
  • Embodiment 2 The default route indication information may be obtained by UE1 from UE2.
  • UE1 can obtain default route indication information by referring to the process shown in FIG. 10 , including the following steps:
  • S1001a After the UE2 establishes the Uu communication connection with the AN device, the UE2 obtains the default route indication information from the AN device.
  • S1001b After UE2 establishes an SL communication connection with other UEs (eg, UE3), obtain default route indication information from other UEs.
  • UEs eg, UE3
  • S1001a and S1001b are parallel schemes, and UE2 can use any one of the schemes to obtain the default route indication information.
  • S1002 UE1 establishes an SL communication connection with UE2.
  • S1003 UE2 sends default route indication information to UE1.
  • UE1 may determine that the transmission object is UE2 through the following two implementation manners.
  • the first implementation is a first implementation:
  • UE1 determines UE2 with which SL communication connection exists.
  • UE2 may also send UE2's indication information to UE1, so that UE1 can determine that the default route indication information corresponds to UE2 according to the indication information, so that the target route indication information of the first data packet is determined to be the default route indication information.
  • the routing indication information it is determined that the transmission object of the first data packet is UE2.
  • UE2 may also send to UE1 routing information containing the corresponding relationship between the default route indication information and the corresponding next-hop node address (add.UE2), so that UE1 can determine that the target route indication information of the first data packet is the default.
  • routing indication information determine the routing information including the default routing indication information, and determine the next hop node address (add.UE2) corresponding to the default routing indication information in the routing information, and finally determine that the transmission object is the next hop node.
  • the next hop node of the address pair ie, UE2 indicated by add.UE2).
  • two adjacent UEs in order to implement the routing function, two adjacent UEs also need to obtain the address of each other, so that the address of the next-hop node can be accurately determined according to the address of the next-hop node during the routing transmission process. the indicated object.
  • the process of determining the address of each other between two adjacent relay UEs reference may be made to the specific description in the first implementation, which will not be repeated here.
  • UE2 After receiving the second data packet, UE2 obtains the target routing indication information (that is, the default routing indication information add.xxx) of the second data packet from the BAP header of the second data packet; when determining the purpose included in the target routing indication information When the address (add.xxx) is different from its own address (add.UE2), at least one of the stored routing information determines the target routing information (for example, the routing indication information in Table 10) that contains the target routing indication information, and the destination routing information In the routing information, determine the address of the next-hop node corresponding to the target routing indication information (ie add.UE3), and determine that the transmission object is the next-hop node indicated by the address of the next-hop node (ie, the UE3 indicated by add.UE3) . UE2 sends the second data packet to UE3. UE3 receives the second data packet from UE2.
  • the target routing indication information that is, the default routing indication information add.xxx
  • UE3 After receiving the second data packet, UE3 obtains the target routing indication information (that is, the default routing indication information add.xxx) of the second data packet from the BAP header of the second data packet; when determining the purpose included in the target routing indication information When the address (add.xxx) is different from its own address (add.UE3), at least one of the stored routing information determines the target routing information (for example, the routing indication information in Table 11) that contains the target routing indication information, and the destination routing information In the routing information, determine the address of the next hop node corresponding to the target routing indication information (ie add.UE4), and determine that the transmission object is the next hop node indicated by the address of the next hop node (ie, UE4 indicated by add.UE4) .
  • UE3 sends the second data packet to UE4.
  • UE4 receives the second data packet from UE3.
  • the UE4 can obtain the target route indication information of the second data packet from the BAP header of the second data packet (that is, the default route indication information add.xxx ), and according to the target routing indication information, the implementation manner described in S205 is used to determine that the transmission object is an AN device.
  • UE4 sends the second data packet to the AN device.
  • the AN device receives the second data packet from UE4.
  • S906-S907 are the same as S206-S207 in Embodiment 1, and will not be repeated here.
  • the AN device allocates an address for UE1 (ie add.UE1), and determines the uplink dedicated routing indication information (hereinafter referred to as UL routing indication information-UE1) and downlink dedicated routing indication information (hereinafter referred to as UL routing indication information- UE1), and send/configure the UL routing indication information-UE1 and add.UE1 to UE1, so that UE1 can use the UL routing indication information-UE1 to realize uplink transmission of UE1.
  • UL routing indication information-UE1 uplink dedicated routing indication information
  • UL routing indication information-UE1 downlink dedicated routing indication information
  • the AN device when the AN device configures the UL routing indication information-UE1 and add.UE1 to UE1, the AN device can send the above information to UE2, and UE2 sends it to UE1 through the SL RRC message.
  • the AN device saves downlink dedicated routing indication information (UL routing indication information-UE1) of UE1.
  • the UL routing indication information-UE1 includes the address of the destination relay UE in the uplink transmission direction (the last relay UE in the uplink transmission direction).
  • the UL routing indication information-UE1 includes the address add.UE4 of the UE4.
  • the DL routing indication information-UE1 contains the destination device address (ie add.UE1) in the downlink transmission direction.
  • the number of UL routing indication information-UE1 may be one, and the number of DL routing indication information-UE1 may also be one.
  • the AN device may determine the uplink dedicated routing indication information (including multiple UL routing indication information-UE1) and/or the downlink dedicated routing indication information (including multiple DL routing indications) with the bearer as the granularity info-UE1). Different UL routing indication information-UE1/DL routing indication information-UE1 has a corresponding relationship with different bearers.
  • the AN device configures new routing information for each relay UE in the link according to the UL routing indication information-UE1 and DL routing indication information-UE1 of UE1, so that each relay UE can realize the uplink of UE1 according to the routing information transmission and downstream transmission.
  • the new routing information allocated by the AN device to UE2, UE3, and UE4 are shown in Table 12-Table 14 respectively:
  • Table 12 Routing information for UE2
  • Table 13 Routing information for UE3
  • Table 14 Routing information for UE4
  • each device in the above-mentioned link 1 can use the UL routing indication information-UE1 and the DL routing indication information-UE1 to implement uplink transmission and downlink transmission of UE1.
  • S909-S913 correspond to the uplink transmission process of UE1
  • S914-S918 correspond to the downlink transmission process of UE1.
  • the uplink transmission process of the UE1 is first described below.
  • UE1 generates a third data packet, wherein the third data packet does not have a BAP header.
  • the third data packet may carry user plane data or control plane data of UE1, which is not limited in this application.
  • UE1 uses the UL route indication information-UE1 as the target route indication information of the third data packet, and adds a BAP header to the third data packet to generate a fourth data packet, wherein the BAP header of the fourth data packet contains the target route indication information ( UL routing indication information-UE1, including add.UE4).
  • UE1 sends a fourth data packet to UE2.
  • UE2 receives the fourth data packet from UE1.
  • UE1 may also determine that the transmission object is UE2 by using the following two implementation manners.
  • the first implementation is a first implementation:
  • UE1 determines UE2 with which SL communication connection exists.
  • UE2 may also send UE2's indication information to UE1, so that UE1 can determine UL routing indication information according to the indication information - UE1 corresponds to UE2, so as to determine the target route indication information of the third data packet When it is the UL routing indication information-UE1, it is determined that the transmission object of the third data packet is UE2.
  • the AN device may also send to UE1 routing information that includes the correspondence between UL routing indication information-UE1 and the corresponding next-hop node address (add.UE2), so that UE1 can determine the target routing indication of the third data packet.
  • the information is UL routing indication information-UE1
  • It is determined that the transmission object is the next-hop node of the next-hop node address pair (ie, UE2 indicated by add.UE2).
  • two adjacent UEs in order to implement the routing function, two adjacent UEs also need to obtain the address of each other, so that the address of the next-hop node can be accurately determined according to the address of the next-hop node during the routing transmission process. the indicated object.
  • the process of determining the address of each other between two adjacent relay UEs reference may be made to the specific description in the first implementation, which will not be repeated here.
  • UE2 After receiving the fourth data packet, UE2 obtains the target routing indication information of the fourth data packet (ie, UL routing indication information-UE1, including add.UE4) from the BAP header of the fourth data packet; when determining the target routing indication When the destination address (add.UE4) contained in the information is different from its own address (add.UE2), at least one stored routing information determines the destination routing information that contains the destination routing indication information (for example, the first route in Table 12). Indication information), determine the next hop node address (ie add.UE3) corresponding to the target routing indication information in the target routing information, and determine that the transmission object is the next hop node indicated by the next hop node address (ie add. .UE3 indicated by UE3). UE2 sends a fourth data packet to UE3. UE3 receives the fourth data packet from UE2.
  • the target routing indication information of the fourth data packet ie, UL routing indication information-UE1, including add.UE4
  • UE3 After receiving the fourth data packet, UE3 obtains the target routing indication information of the fourth data packet (ie, UL routing indication information-UE1, including add.UE4) from the BAP header of the fourth data packet; when determining the target routing indication When the destination address (add.UE4) contained in the information is different from its own address (add.UE3), at least one stored routing information determines the destination routing information that contains the destination routing indication information (for example, the first route in Table 13). Indication information), determine the next hop node address (ie add.UE4) corresponding to the target routing indication information in the target routing information, and determine that the transmission object is the next hop node indicated by the next hop node address (ie add. .UE4 indicated by UE4). UE3 sends a fourth data packet to UE4. UE4 receives the fourth data packet from UE3.
  • the target routing indication information of the fourth data packet ie, UL routing indication information-UE1, including add.UE4
  • the target routing indication information ie, UL routing indication information
  • UE4 can obtain the target routing indication information of the fourth data packet from the BAP header of the fourth data packet (that is, the UL routing indication information-UE1, Including add.UE4), and according to the target routing indication information, the implementation manner described in S212 is used to determine that the transmission object is an AN device.
  • UE4 sends a fourth data packet to the AN device.
  • the AN device receives the fourth data packet from UE4.
  • the AN device obtains a fifth data packet, where the fifth data packet does not have a BAP header.
  • the fifth data packet may carry user plane data or control plane data (eg, signaling) of the UE1, which is not limited in this application.
  • the fifth data packet may be generated by the AN device itself, or may be received from the core network device.
  • the AN device takes the stored downlink dedicated routing indication information of UE1 (DL routing indication information-UE1, including add.UE1) as the target routing indication information of the fifth data packet.
  • the AN device adds a BAP header to the fifth data packet to generate a sixth data packet, wherein the BAP header of the sixth data packet includes target routing indication information add.UE1.
  • the AN device sends the sixth data packet to UE4.
  • UE4 receives the sixth data packet from the AN device.
  • the AN device may determine the head relay UE—UE4 in the communication link where the UE1 is located according to the topology relationship of the communication system.
  • the AN device may also determine the header relay UE (ie DL routing indication information-UE1) corresponding to the downlink dedicated routing indication information of UE1 Routing indication information - UE1 corresponds to UE4). In this way, when determining that the target route indication information of the fifth data packet is the DL route indication information-UE1, the AN device may further determine that the transmission object is the UE4 corresponding to the DL route indication information-UE1.
  • the AN device may maintain at least one piece of routing information (both are downlink routing information), so that after determining the downlink dedicated routing indication information (DL routing indication information-UE1) of UE1 in S908, it can generate
  • a piece of routing information is as follows:
  • Routing indication information add.UE1, next-hop node address: add.UE4.
  • the AN device determines the target routing indication information of the fifth data packet. , including the following steps:
  • the AN device determines the target bearer used for transmitting the fifth data packet
  • the AN device determines that the target routing indication information is: among the multiple DL routing indication information-UE1, the target DL routing indication information-UE1 that has a corresponding relationship with the target bearer.
  • UE4 may obtain the target routing indication information (ie, DL routing indication information-UE1, including add.UE1) of the sixth data packet from the BAP header of the sixth data packet.
  • the target routing indication information ie, DL routing indication information-UE1, including add.UE1
  • UE4 determines that the destination address (add.UE1) contained in the target routing indication information is different from its own address (add.UE4), at least one piece of routing information stored determines the target routing information (for example, Table 14) that contains the target routing indication information. Item 1), determine the next hop node address (ie add.UE3) corresponding to the target routing indication information in the target routing information, and determine that the transmission object is the next hop node indicated by the next hop node address. (ie UE3 indicated by add.UE3).
  • UE4 sends the sixth data packet to UE3.
  • UE3 receives the sixth data packet from UE4.
  • UE3 After receiving the sixth data packet, UE3 obtains the target routing indication information of the sixth data packet from the BAP header of the sixth data packet (ie, DL routing indication information-UE1-add.UE1); when determining the target routing indication When the destination address (add.UE1) contained in the information is different from its own address (add.UE3), at least one stored routing information determines the destination routing information containing the destination routing indication information (for example, item 2 in Table 13) , in the target routing information, determine the next hop node address (ie add.UE2) corresponding to the target routing indication information, and determine that the transmission object is the next hop node indicated by the next hop node address (ie, add.UE2 indicated UE2). UE3 sends the sixth data packet to UE2, and UE2 receives the sixth data packet from UE3.
  • the target routing indication information of the sixth data packet from the BAP header of the sixth data packet (ie, DL routing indication information-UE1-add.UE1); when determining the target routing indication
  • UE2 After receiving the sixth data packet, UE2 can obtain the target routing indication information (ie, DL routing indication information-UE1-add.UE1) of the sixth data packet from the BAP header of the sixth data packet; When the destination address (add.UE1) contained in the target route indication information is different from its own address (add.UE2), at least one route information stored determines the target route information (for example, No. 1 in Table 12) that contains the target route indication information. 2), determine the next hop node address (ie add.UE1) corresponding to the target routing indication information in the target routing information, and determine that the transmission object is the next hop node indicated by the next hop node address (ie add. .UE1 indicated by UE1). UE2 sends the sixth data packet to UE1, and UE1 receives the sixth data packet from UE2.
  • the target routing indication information ie, DL routing indication information-UE1-add.UE1 of the sixth data packet from the BAP header of the sixth data packet
  • the target route information for example, No. 1
  • the UE1 After the UE1 receives the sixth data packet, it can obtain the target routing indication information of the sixth data packet from the BAP header of the sixth data packet (ie, DL routing indication information-UE1-add.UE1); after the UE determines the target When the destination address (add.UE1) included in the routing indication information is the same as the own address (add.UE1), the sixth data packet is decapsulated to obtain the fifth data packet without the BAP header. Finally, UE1 can perform subsequent processing according to the data carried in the fifth data packet.
  • the target routing indication information of the sixth data packet from the BAP header of the sixth data packet (ie, DL routing indication information-UE1-add.UE1); after the UE determines the target
  • the destination address (add.UE1) included in the routing indication information is the same as the own address (add.UE1)
  • the sixth data packet is decapsulated to obtain the fifth data packet without the BAP header.
  • UE1 can perform subsequent processing according to the data carried in the fifth data packet.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a routing method, which can use the address of the UE as routing indication information to guide the routing transmission of data packets, so as to implement routing between an AN device and a remote UE in a multi-hop communication scenario.
  • routing transmission in a single-hop communication scenario can also be implemented, and the specific process can refer to the flow in the above multi-hop communication scenario, which will not be repeated here.
  • this embodiment provides a routing mechanism 4, which includes:
  • the UE After generating the data packet 1, the UE adds a BAP header to the data packet 1 to generate the data packet 2.
  • the BAP header of the data packet 2 includes target route indication information, and the target route indication information is the uplink dedicated route indication information of the UE (indicating the address of the target relay UE).
  • the UE then transmits data packet 2 to the relay UE to which the UE is connected.
  • any UE After receiving the data packet 3, any UE first determines whether the destination address contained in the target routing indication information in the BAP header of the data packet 3 is the same as its own address;
  • the data packet 3 is its own data packet, decapsulate the data packet 3 to obtain a data packet 4 without a BAP header, and then perform subsequent processing based on the data carried in the data packet 4;
  • search for the target routing information containing the target routing indication information in at least one locally stored routing information and determine the next hop node address corresponding to the target routing indication information in the target routing information, and determine the next hop node address. Jump to the next hop indicated by the node address; and send packet 3 to the determined next hop.
  • the policy executed by the head relay UE is similar to the policy in mechanism 1, that is, the head relay UE can determine the follow-up action in combination with the interface. . Specifically, after the header relay UE receives the data packet 2 and determines that the destination address included in the target routing indication information in the BAP header of the data packet 2 is the same as its own address, it determines the interface used to receive the data packet 2; if If the interface is a Uu interface, it is further determined that the data packet 2 is its own data packet; if the interface is a PC5 interface, it is determined that the AN device is the transmission object.
  • the content in the BAP header of the data packet can be referred to as shown in FIG. 12 .
  • Embodiment 5 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 5:
  • the address of the UE or the address of the AN device is used as routing indication information to guide the routing transmission of the data packet.
  • the method provided by the embodiment of the present application can also be applied to the flow chart of the routing method shown in FIG. 9 . The following continues to take link 1 as an example, and with reference to FIG. 9 , the method provided by the embodiment of the present application will be described in detail. Similar to Embodiment 4, in this embodiment of the present application, the BAP header of the data packet contains target routing indication information, and does not need to contain the local identifier of the target device.
  • the AN device configures an address and at least one piece of routing information for each UE in the communication system.
  • the AN device itself is also configured with an address (ie, add.AN).
  • the AN device can send its own address to the head relay UE in each link, so that the head relay UE can subsequently determine the AN device indicated by the address of the AN device, so as to determine the transmission object, and then realize the transmission to the AN device. Packet transmission.
  • add.AN may be a default AN address, or may be allocated by the AN device for itself, or configured by a user, which is not limited in this application.
  • the default route indication information add.xxx involved in the embodiment of the present application may be the address add.AN of the AN device, or another default address indicating the AN device, which is not limited in the present application.
  • the following embodiments illustrate that add.xxx is different from add.AN.
  • the routing information configured by the AN device for each UE is also different from the routing information in the fourth embodiment.
  • the AN device Since the AN device has an address, for uplink transmission, the next hop node of the head relay UE in each link is the AN device. Therefore, the AN device can configure uplink routing information for each UE, and the uplink routing information is different from that in the fourth embodiment. (It should be noted that the downlink routing information configured by the AN device for each relay UE in this embodiment is the same as that in the fourth embodiment).
  • this embodiment continues to take link 1 as an example, and the uplink routing information configured by the AN device for UE2, UE3 and UE4 including the default routing indication information is shown in Table 15- 17 shows:
  • Table 15 Routing information for UE2
  • Table 16 Routing information for UE3
  • Table 17 Routing information for UE4
  • S901-S904 are the same as S901-S904 in the fourth embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
  • the UE4 can obtain the target routing indication information (ie, the default routing indication information add.xxx) of the second data packet from the BAP header of the second data packet; when the UE4 determines the target routing indication information
  • the included destination address (add.xxx) is different from its own address (add.UE4)
  • at least one of the stored routing information determines the target routing information (for example, the routing information in Table 17) that includes the target routing indication information.
  • the target routing information determine the address of the next hop node corresponding to the target routing indication information (ie add.AN), and determine that the transmission object is the next hop node indicated by the address of the next hop node (ie, the address indicated by add.AN) AN device).
  • UE4 sends the second data packet to the AN device.
  • the AN device receives the second data packet from UE4.
  • S906-S907 are the same as S906-S907 in the fourth embodiment, and will not be repeated here.
  • the AN device allocates an address for UE1 (ie add.UE1), and determines the uplink dedicated routing indication information (hereinafter referred to as UL routing indication information-UE1) and downlink dedicated routing indication information (hereinafter referred to as DL routing indication information- UE1), and send/configure the UL routing indication information-UE1 and add.UE1 to UE1, so that UE1 can use the UL routing indication information-UE1 to realize uplink transmission of UE1.
  • UL routing indication information-UE1 uplink dedicated routing indication information
  • DL routing indication information- UE1 downlink dedicated routing indication information
  • the AN device when the AN device configures the UL routing indication information-UE1 and add.UE1 to UE1, the AN device can send the above information to UE2, and UE2 sends it to UE1 through the SL RRC message.
  • the UL routing indication information-UE1 includes the address of the destination device in the uplink transmission direction.
  • the destination device is an AN device. Therefore, the UL routing indication information-UE1 includes the address add.AN of the AN device.
  • the DL routing indication information-UE1 contains the destination device address (ie add.UE1) in the downlink transmission direction.
  • the number of UL routing indication information-UE1 may be one, and the number of DL routing indication information-UE1 may also be one.
  • the AN device may determine the uplink dedicated routing indication information (including multiple UL routing indication information-UE1) and/or the downlink dedicated routing indication information (including multiple DL routing indications) with the bearer as the granularity info-UE1). Different UL routing indication information-UE1/DL routing indication information-UE1 has a corresponding relationship with different bearers.
  • the AN device configures new routing information for each relay UE in the link according to the UL routing indication information-UE1 and DL routing indication information-UE2 of UE1, so that each relay UE can realize the uplink of UE1 according to the routing information transmission and downstream transmission.
  • the new routing information allocated by the AN device to UE2, UE3, and UE4 are shown in Table 18-Table 20 respectively:
  • Table 18 Routing information for UE2
  • Table 19 Routing information for UE3
  • Table 20 Routing information for UE4
  • each device in the above-mentioned link 1 can use the UL routing indication information-UE1 and the DL routing indication information-UE1 to implement uplink transmission and downlink transmission of UE1.
  • S909-S913 correspond to the uplink transmission process of UE1
  • S914-S918 correspond to the downlink transmission process of UE1.
  • each device in Link 1 can use the same process as in Embodiment 4.
  • the DL routing indication information-UE1 Realize the downlink transmission process. Based on this, the downlink transmission process of S214-S217 is not repeated in this embodiment of the present application, and the specific process may refer to the description in the first embodiment above.
  • the UL routing indication information-UE1 configured by the AN device for UE1 is different from that in Embodiment 4, the following describes in detail the uplink transmission processes S909-S913 implemented by each device in link 1 according to the UL routing indication information-UE1.
  • UE1 generates a third data packet, wherein the third data packet does not have a BAP header.
  • the third data packet may carry user plane data or control plane data of UE1, which is not limited in this application.
  • UE1 uses the UL route indication information-UE1 as the target route indication information of the third data packet, and adds a BAP header to the third data packet to generate a fourth data packet, wherein the BAP header of the fourth data packet contains the target route indication information ( UL Routing Indication Information - UE1, including add.AN).
  • UE1 sends a fourth data packet to UE2.
  • UE2 receives the fourth data packet from UE1.
  • UE1 can also determine that the transmission object is UE2 through two implementation manners. For the specific process, refer to the corresponding description in S909 in Embodiment 4, which will not be repeated this time.
  • UE2 After receiving the fourth data packet, UE2 obtains the target routing indication information of the fourth data packet from the BAP header of the fourth data packet (ie, UL routing indication information-UE1, including add.AN); when determining the target routing indication When the destination address (add.AN) contained in the information is different from its own address (add.UE2), at least one stored routing information determines the destination routing information that contains the destination routing indication information (for example, the first route in Table 18). Indication information), determine the next hop node address (ie add.UE3) corresponding to the target routing indication information in the target routing information, and determine that the transmission object is the next hop node indicated by the next hop node address (ie add. .UE3 indicated by UE3). UE2 sends a fourth data packet to UE3. UE3 receives the fourth data packet from UE2.
  • the target routing indication information of the fourth data packet from the BAP header of the fourth data packet (ie, UL routing indication information-UE1, including add.AN); when determining the target routing indication
  • UE3 After receiving the fourth data packet, UE3 obtains the target routing indication information of the fourth data packet (ie, UL routing indication information-UE1, including add.AN) from the BAP header of the fourth data packet; when determining the target routing indication When the destination address (add.AN) contained in the information is different from its own address (add.UE3), at least one stored routing information determines the destination routing information containing the destination routing indication information (for example, the first route in Table 19). Indication information), determine the next hop node address (ie add.UE4) corresponding to the target routing indication information in the target routing information, and determine that the transmission object is the next hop node indicated by the next hop node address (ie add. .UE4 indicated by UE4). UE3 sends a fourth data packet to UE4. UE4 receives the fourth data packet from UE3.
  • the target routing indication information of the fourth data packet ie, UL routing indication information-UE1, including add.AN
  • UE4 After receiving the fourth data packet, UE4 obtains the target routing indication information of the fourth data packet (ie, UL routing indication information-UE1, including add.AN) from the BAP header of the fourth data packet; when determining the target routing indication When the destination address (add.AN) contained in the information is different from its own address (add.UE4), at least one stored routing information determines the destination routing information that contains the destination routing indication information (for example, the first route in Table 20). Indication information), determine the next hop node address (ie add.AN) corresponding to the target routing indication information in the target routing information, and determine that the transmission object is the next hop node indicated by the next hop node address (ie add.AN) AN device indicated by .AN). UE4 sends a fourth data packet to the AN device. The AN device receives the fourth data packet from UE4.
  • the target routing indication information of the fourth data packet ie, UL routing indication information-UE1, including add.AN
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a routing method, which can use the address of the UE or the address of the AN device as routing indication information to guide the routing transmission of data packets, so as to realize the communication between the AN device and the remote UE in a multi-hop communication scenario. routing between.
  • routing transmission in a single-hop communication scenario can also be implemented.
  • routing transmission in a single-hop communication scenario can also be implemented.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a routing mechanism 5, and the mechanism 5 includes:
  • the UE After generating the data packet 1, the UE adds a BAP header to the data packet 1 to generate the data packet 2.
  • the BAP header of the data packet 2 includes target route indication information, and the target route indication information is the uplink dedicated route indication information of the UE (indicating the address of the target relay UE).
  • the UE then transmits data packet 2 to the relay UE to which the UE is connected.
  • any UE After receiving the data packet 3, any UE first determines whether the destination address contained in the target routing indication information in the BAP header of the data packet 3 is the same as its own address;
  • the data packet 3 is its own data packet, decapsulate the data packet 3 to obtain a data packet 4 without a BAP header, and then perform subsequent processing based on the data carried in the data packet 4;
  • search for the target routing information containing the target routing indication information in at least one locally stored routing information and determine the next hop node address corresponding to the target routing indication information in the target routing information, and determine the next hop node address. Jump to the next hop indicated by the node address; and send packet 3 to the determined next hop.
  • the entire set of protocol stacks finally formed may be as shown in FIG. 11 .
  • the content in the BAP header of the data packet can be referred to as shown in FIG. 13 .
  • Embodiment 6 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 6
  • the embodiments of the present application further provide one another routing method.
  • the address of the device and the path ID are used together as routing indication information to guide the routing transmission of the data packet.
  • the path ID allocated by the AN device to each link can also distinguish the transmission direction, or not distinguish the transmission direction.
  • the following is an example in which the AN device assigns a path ID to each communication link regardless of the transmission direction.
  • the AN device allocates corresponding path IDs to the following communication links:
  • the routing information allocated by the AN device to the UE in the link 1 in implementing S908b is as shown in Table 21-Table 23.
  • Table 21 Routing information for UE2
  • Table 22 Routing information for UE3
  • Table 23 Routing information for UE4
  • the AN device allocates uplink dedicated route indication information and downlink dedicated route indication information to the remote UE.
  • the routing indication information not only includes the corresponding address but also needs to include the path ID allocated by the AN device for the communication link where the remote UE is located.
  • the routing mechanism 6 provided in this embodiment of the present application, reference may be made to the mechanism 4 provided by the fourth embodiment or the mechanism 5 provided by the fifth embodiment. For details, reference may be made to the above detailed description of the mechanism 4 or the mechanism 5, which will not be repeated here. It is worth noting that in this mechanism 5, the path identifier and the address of the device in the routing indication information contained in the target routing information found by the UE are the same as the target path identifier and destination address of the target routing indication information, respectively.
  • the content in the BAP header of the data packet can be referred to as shown in FIG. 14 .
  • Embodiment 7 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 7:
  • the path identifier is used as the routing indication information to guide the routing transmission of the data packet.
  • the method provided by this embodiment will be described in detail below with reference to the flowchart of the routing method shown in FIG. 15 .
  • UE1 establishes a SL communication connection with UE2, and establishes a Uu communication connection with an AN device through UE2 and other relay UEs.
  • UE1 may allocate a device identifier (which may be abbreviated as EID-UE1 later) to itself during or after UE2 establishes an SL communication connection; or
  • UE2 may allocate a device identifier EID-UE1 to UE1 during or after establishing an SL communication connection with UE1 ; or the AN device may allocate the device identifier EID-UE1 to the UE1 during or after the establishment of the Uu communication connection with the UE1.
  • the device identifier involved in the embodiments of the present application may be used to identify other UEs accessing the relay UE within the range of the relay UE.
  • the device identifier may be a local identifier (Local ID, LID for short), or a layer 2 identifier (L2 ID), which is not limited in this application.
  • S1502 UE2 or UE1 notifies the AN device of the device identification EID-UE1 of UE1.
  • the AN device determines the uplink dedicated routing information (UL routing information-UE1) and the downlink dedicated routing information (DL routing information-UE1) of UE1; and according to the UL routing information-UE1 and DL routing information-UE1 is a chain.
  • Each relay UE in path 1 is configured with new routing information, so that each relay UE can implement uplink transmission and downlink transmission of UE1 according to the routing information.
  • both the UL routing indication information-UE1 and the DL routing indication information-UE1 contain a path identifier (path ID-UE1) allocated by the AN device to the UE1.
  • path ID-UE1 path identifier allocated by the AN device to the UE1.
  • the path ID (path ID-UE1) of UE1 includes two: the path ID in the uplink transmission direction of UE1 (referred to as UL path ID-UE1), and the path ID in the downlink transmission direction of UE1 (referred to as DL for short) path ID-UE1).
  • the route identifier (path ID-UE1) of UE1 is one, but the dedicated route indication information in different directions also includes corresponding transmission direction indications. That is, the UL routing indication information-UE1 also includes the UL indication, and the DL routing indication information-UE1 also includes the DL indication.
  • the AN device In order to implement routing transmission of UE1, the AN device also needs to provide at least one piece of routing information for each relay UE.
  • any one of the routing information includes a routing indication information and a next-hop node device identifier corresponding to the routing indication information.
  • At least one routing information provided by the AN device for each relay UE includes downlink routing information and uplink routing information.
  • the downlink routing information and uplink routing information may not be distinguished in form, but the downlink routing information includes DL routing information. Routing indication information-UE1, and the uplink routing information includes UL routing indication information-UE1.
  • the new routing information allocated by the AN device to UE2, UE3, and UE4 are shown in Table 24-Table 26, respectively.
  • Table 24 Routing information for UE2
  • the second routing information in Table 24 is optional.
  • the AN device allocates the two pieces of routing information in the table 24 to the UE2; in another embodiment, the AN device allocates only the first piece of routing information in the table 24 to the UE2.
  • the default EID-UE may be the default device identifier of the UE.
  • UE2 determines that the next-hop node device identifier corresponding to the target routing indication information of a certain data packet is the default EID-UE, it means that there is no next-hop node.
  • the data packet needs to be forwarded to the remote UE of UE2, or the data packet is its own data packet.
  • the device identification of the AN device may be the second default device identification, such as EID-111.
  • Table 25 Routing information for UE3
  • Table 26 Routing information for UE4
  • each UE when two UEs establish an SL communication connection, each UE will allocate an L2 ID to the SL communication connection. For example, after UE1 and UE2 establish an SL communication connection, UE1 allocates an L2 ID-UE1 to the communication connection, UE2 allocates an L2 ID-UE2 to the communication connection, and UE1 and UE2 will notify the opposite side of their respective L2 IDs.
  • the L2 ID-UE1 is added to the data packet as the source device identifier, and the L2 ID-UE2 is added to the data packet as the destination device identifier; similarly, UE2 sends the data packet to UE2 , add the L2 ID-UE2 as the source device identifier to the data packet, and add the L2 ID-UE1 as the destination device identifier to the data packet.
  • the relay UE allocates device identities (eg, local identities) to other UEs accessing it, in the downlink transmission direction, these other UEs are the next-hop nodes of the relay UE. Therefore, the relay UE can identify the next hop node indicated by the device identity of the next hop node (the local identity of the next hop node), thereby realizing the downlink transmission of the data packet.
  • the general relay UE cannot directly identify the next-hop node indicated by the device identifier of the next-hop node. For this reason, this application can use the SL communication connection identifier (ie L2 ID) to use the following
  • the implementation solves the problem:
  • the first implementation is a first implementation:
  • the AN device sends the following two pieces of information to each relay UE: the device identifier of the next hop node in its uplink transmission direction, the L2 ID of the next hop node (that is, the next hop node is for the relay UE and the next hop node). SL communication connections between one-hop nodes are allocated).
  • the AN device sends UE3's device identity and L2 ID to UE2 (EID-UE3 (ie LID-UE3), L2 ID-UE3); the AN device sends UE4's device identity and L2 ID ( EID-UE4 (LID-UE4), L2 ID-UE4).
  • EID-UE3 may be allocated by the UE4 for the UE3, and the EID-UE4 may be allocated by the AN device or the UE4.
  • the AN device sends the device identification of the AN device (ie, EID-AN) to the head relay UEs in each communication link, so that the head relay UEs can determine that the device identification of the AN device indicates the AN device.
  • the device identifier of the AN device may be the first default device identifier, such as EID-000.
  • the UE can assign a device identity (such as a local identity) to the other UE with which the SL communication connection is established, and report the other UE to the AN device and the L2 ID of the other UE (assigned by the other UE for the SL communication connection between the UE and the other UE).
  • a device identity such as a local identity
  • the AN device can generate the above routing information according to the received device identifiers.
  • UE4 allocates a device identifier (EID-UE3, namely LID-UE3) to UE3, and UE3 also allocates a dedicated device identifier (EID-UE4-UL, which is different from the local identifier of UE4) to UE4.
  • EID-UE4-UL a dedicated device identifier
  • LID-UE4 send the dedicated device identity of UE4 and the L2 ID-UE4 allocated by UE4 for the SL communication connection to the AN device.
  • the AN device allocates uplink routing information to UE3 according to the EID-UE4-UL, that is, the EID-UE4 included in the first routing information in Table 25 is actually the EID-UE4-UL in this example;
  • EID-UE3 allocates downlink routing information to UE4, that is, the EID-UE3 included in the second piece of routing information in Table 26 is the EID-UE3 (LID-UE3) allocated by UE4 to UE3 in this example.
  • UE3 allocates a device identifier (EID-UE2, ie LID-UE2) to UE2, and UE2 also allocates a dedicated device identifier (EID-UE3-UL) to UE3, which is different from UE3's local Identify LID-UE3), and send the dedicated device identity of UE4 and the L2 ID-UE4 allocated by UE4 for the SL communication connection to the AN device.
  • EID-UE2, ie LID-UE2 ie LID-UE2
  • EID-UE3-UL dedicated device identifier
  • the AN device allocates uplink routing information to UE2 according to the EID-UE3-UL, that is, the EID-UE3 included in the first routing information in Table 24 is actually the EID-UE3-UL in this example;
  • EID-UE2 allocates downlink routing information to UE3, that is, the EID-UE3 included in the second piece of routing information in Table 25 is the EID-UE3 (LID-UE3) allocated by UE3 to UE3 in this example.
  • the head relay UEs in each communication link in the communication system also assign a device identification (ie, EID-AN) to the connected AN devices, so that these head relay UEs can determine that the device identification of the AN device indicates an AN device.
  • Any head relay UE may send the device identification assigned to the AN device to the AN device, so that the AN device allocates uplink routing information to the head relay UE according to the device identification of the AN device.
  • the EID-AN included in the routing information in Table 26 is allocated by UE4 for the AN device.
  • the device identifier of the AN device may be the first default device identifier, such as EID-000, in the communication system; in this way, the head relay UE in each communication link may no longer need to assign a device identifier to the AN device.
  • EID-000 the first default device identifier
  • each device in the above-mentioned link 1 can use the UL routing indication information-UE1 and the DL routing indication information-UE1 to implement uplink transmission and downlink transmission of UE1.
  • S1503-S1507 correspond to the uplink transmission process of UE1
  • S1508-S1511 correspond to the downlink transmission process of UE1.
  • the uplink transmission process of the UE1 is first described below.
  • UE1 generates a first data packet, wherein the first data packet does not have a BAP header.
  • the first data packet may carry user plane data or control plane data of UE1, which is not implicitly limited in this application.
  • UE1 sends the first data packet to UE2, and UE2 receives the first data packet from UE1.
  • UE2 After UE2 receives the first data packet, it uses the uplink dedicated routing indication information (UL routing indication information-UE1, UL path ID-UE1) of UE1 as the target routing indication information of the first data packet; when UE2 saves at least When a piece of routing information determines the target routing information (such as item 1 in Table 24) that contains the target routing indication information, the next hop node device identifier (ie, EID- UE3), and determine that the transmission object is the next-hop node indicated by the device identification of the next-hop node (ie, UE3 indicated by EID-UE3).
  • the target routing information such as item 1 in Table 24
  • UE2 determines that the target device identifier of the first data packet is the device identifier of the source device of the first data packet (ie, the device identifier of UE1: EID-UE1), and adds a BAP header to the first data packet , and generate a second data packet, wherein the BAP header of the second data packet contains target routing indication information UL path ID-UE1 and target device identification EID-UE1.
  • UE2 sends the second data packet to UE3.
  • UE3 receives the second data packet from UE2.
  • UE3 After receiving the second data packet, UE3 obtains the target routing indication information of the second data packet (ie, UL routing indication information-UE1, UL path ID-UE1) from the BAP header of the second data packet; When at least one routing information determines the target routing information (for example, item 1 in Table 25) that contains the target routing information, the next-hop node device identifier (ie, EID- UE4), and determine that the transmission object is the next-hop node indicated by the device identity of the next-hop node (ie, the UE4 indicated by EID-UE4).
  • UE3 sends the second data packet to UE4.
  • UE4 receives the second data packet from UE3.
  • UE4 After receiving the second data packet, UE4 obtains the target routing indication information of the second data packet (that is, UL routing indication information-UE1, UL path ID-UE1) from the BAP header of the second data packet; When at least one routing information determines the target routing information (for example, item 1 in Table 26) that contains the target routing information, the next-hop node device identifier (ie, EID- AN), and determine that the transmission object is the next-hop node indicated by the device identifier of the next-hop node (ie, the AN device indicated by the EID-AN). UE4 sends the second data packet to the AN device. The AN device receives the second data packet from UE4.
  • the target routing indication information of the second data packet that is, UL routing indication information-UE1, UL path ID-UE1
  • the AN device After receiving the second data packet, the AN device decapsulates the second data packet to obtain the first data packet without the BAP header.
  • the AN device may perform subsequent processing according to the data carried in the first data packet (eg, user plane data or control plane data), such as sending user plane data to the core network device, or performing corresponding operations according to the control plane data.
  • the AN device obtains a third data packet, where the third data packet does not have a BAP header.
  • the third data packet may carry user plane data or control plane data (eg, signaling) of the UE1, which is not limited in this application.
  • the third data packet may be generated by the AN device itself, or may be received from the core network device.
  • the AN device takes the stored downlink dedicated routing indication information of UE1 (DL routing indication information-UE1, DL path ID-UE1) as the target routing indication information of the third data packet, and determines that the target device of the third data packet is identified as the third data packet.
  • the device identifier of the destination device (UE1) of the data packet ie, EID-UE1, for example, the local identifier LID-UE1 allocated by UE2 to UE1).
  • the AN device adds a BAP header to the third data packet to generate a fourth data packet, wherein the BAP header of the fourth data packet includes target routing indication information DL path ID-UE1 and target device identification EID-UE1.
  • the AN device sends the fourth data packet to UE4.
  • UE4 receives the fourth data packet from the AN device.
  • the AN device may, but is not limited to, determine that the transmission object is UE4 through the following implementations:
  • the AN device may determine the head relay UE—UE4 in the communication link where the UE1 is located according to the topology relationship of the communication system.
  • the AN device may also determine the header relay UE (ie DL routing indication information-UE1) corresponding to the downlink dedicated routing indication information of UE1 Routing indication information - UE1 corresponds to UE4). In this way, when determining that the target route indication information of the third data packet is the DL route indication information-UE1, the AN device may further determine that the transmission object is the UE4 corresponding to the DL route indication information-UE1.
  • the AN device may maintain at least one piece of routing information (both are downlink routing information), so that after allocating downlink dedicated routing indication information (DL routing indication information-UE1) to UE1 in S1502, it can generate A piece of routing information is as follows:
  • Routing indication information DL routing indication information-UE1, next-hop node device identification: EID.UE4.
  • the AN device when the AN device determines that the target route indication information of the third data packet is the DL route indication information-UE1, the AN device can also determine that the transmission object is the DL route indication information-UE1 corresponding to the next hop node device identification, and according to the next hop node device identifier.
  • the next hop node indicated by the hop node device identity (UE4 indicated by EID.UE4).
  • the equipment identifier (EID-UE4) of UE4 may be allocated by the AN equipment.
  • UE4 After receiving the fourth data packet, UE4 obtains the target routing indication information (ie, DL routing indication information-UE1, DL path ID-UE1) of the fourth data packet from the BAP header of the fourth data packet; When at least one routing information determines the target routing information (for example, item 2 in Table 26) that contains the target routing indication information, the next hop node device identifier (ie, EID- UE3), and determine that the transmission object is the next-hop node indicated by the device identification of the next-hop node (ie, UE3 indicated by EID-UE3). UE4 sends a fourth data packet to UE3. UE3 receives the fourth data packet from UE4.
  • the target routing indication information ie, DL routing indication information-UE1, DL path ID-UE1
  • UE3 After receiving the fourth data packet, UE3 obtains the target routing indication information (ie, DL routing indication information-UE1, DL path ID-UE1) of the fourth data packet from the BAP header of the fourth data packet; When at least one routing information determines the target routing information (for example, item 2 in Table 25) that contains the target routing information, the next-hop node device identifier (ie, EID- UE2), and determine that the transmission object is the next hop node indicated by the device identity of the next hop node (ie, UE2 indicated by EID-UE2). UE3 sends the fourth data packet to UE2. UE2 receives the fourth data packet from UE3.
  • the target routing indication information ie, DL routing indication information-UE1, DL path ID-UE1
  • UE2 After receiving the fourth data packet, UE2 obtains the target routing indication information of the fourth data packet (ie, DL routing indication information-UE1, DL path ID-UE1) from the BAP header of the fourth data packet; In the case of routing information containing target routing indication information (such as the second routing information in Table 24), when at least one of the stored routing information determines the target routing information containing the target routing indication information (for example, the second routing information in Table 24) 2), determine the next-hop node device identifier (ie default EID-UE) corresponding to the target route indication information in the target routing information, and determine that the next-hop node indicated by the next-hop node device identifier is UE2 , UE2 obtains the target device identifier (EID-UE1) of the fourth data packet from the BAP header of the fourth data packet; or in the case where UE2 determines that the routing information including the target routing indication information is not stored, from the fourth data packet
  • UE2 determines that the transmission object is the remote UE indicated by the target device identifier (ie, UE1 indicated by EID-UE1). UE2 decapsulates the fourth data packet to obtain the third data packet without the BAP header. UE2 sends the third data packet to UE1. UE1 receives the third data packet from UE2.
  • UE1 may perform subsequent processing according to the data carried in the first data packet.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a routing method, which can use the device identifier of the UE as routing indication information to guide the routing transmission of data packets, so as to implement routing between the AN device and the remote UE in a multi-hop communication scenario.
  • routing transmission in a single-hop communication scenario can also be implemented.
  • specific process reference may be made to the description in the above embodiment, which is not repeated here.
  • the embodiment of the present application provides a routing mechanism 7, and the mechanism 7 includes:
  • the target route indication information is the downlink dedicated route indication information of the remote UE (including the path identifier allocated by the AN device to the remote UE), and the target device identifier is the identifier of the remote UE.
  • any relay UE After receiving the data packet 2, any relay UE searches for the target routing information containing the target routing indication information in at least one locally stored routing information.
  • the data packet 2 is transmitted to the remote device indicated by the target device identifier in the data packet 2; or when it is determined that the target routing information does not exist in the at least one locally stored routing information, the The remote device indicated by the target device identifier in the data packet 2 transmits the data packet 2.
  • the target routing information is found in at least one piece of routing information stored locally, and the next-hop node device identification corresponding to the target routing information is not the second default device identification, the next hop indicated by the next-hop node device identification is determined. node and send packet 2 to the next hop node.
  • the difference is that after receiving the data packet 1 without the BAP header sent by the remote UE, the relay UE determines the target routing indication information and the target device identifier of the data packet 1.
  • the target route indication information is uplink dedicated route indication information of the remote UE (including the path identifier allocated by the AN device to the remote UE), and the target device identifier is the local identifier of the remote UE.
  • the relay UE adds a BAP header to the data packet 1 to generate a data packet 2, and the BAP header includes target routing indication information and target device identification. Then, the transmission object is determined according to the above working mechanism, and the data packet 2 is sent.
  • the entire set of protocol stacks finally formed may be as shown in FIG. 5 .
  • the content in the BAP header of the data packet when the AN device uses each UE as the destination device to send the data packet can be referred to as shown in FIG. 16 .
  • Embodiment 8 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 8
  • an adaptation layer is introduced into the protocol stack to carry bearer ID (bearer ID, BID) and other information to support bearer mapping.
  • bearer ID bearer ID
  • the role of the bearer connection is to realize IP connectivity, transmit service data flow between the UE and the network side, and realize more refined quality of service (Quality of Service, QoS) control.
  • the bearer identifiers may be distinguished by function: default bearer identifier (Befault Bearer), dedicated bearer identifier (Dedicated Bearer); and may also be distinguished by serial number: Bearer 1, Bearer 2 . . .
  • the multi-hop scenario protocol stack is as shown in FIG. 17 or as shown in FIG. 18 .
  • the adaptation layer is BAP as an example for description.
  • the difference between FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 is whether the relay UE acts as two BAP entities or uses one BAP entity to implement the relay UE between the remote UE and the AN device.
  • UE1 when UE1 sends a data packet 1 without a BAP header to UE2, after receiving the data packet 1, UE2 adds a BAP header to the data packet 1 to generate a data packet 2.
  • UE1 sends a data packet 1 with a BAP header to UE2, but the BAP header does not contain target routing indication information and target device identifiers, but only contains bearer identifiers.
  • the UE2 After receiving the data packet 1, the UE2 first decapsulates the data packet 1 to obtain a data packet without a BAP header; and then adds a BAP header to the data packet to generate a data packet 2.
  • the BAP header of the data packet 2 includes target routing indication information, target device identification, and bearer identification.
  • the AN device sends a data packet 3 with a BAP header to the UE4, and the BAP header of the data packet 3 includes target routing indication information and target device identification.
  • the AN device sends a data packet 3 with a BAP header to the UE4, and the BAP header of the data packet 3 includes target routing indication information and target device identification, and also includes a bearer identification.
  • UE2 which is a relay UE at the end of UE1, receives data packet 4, wherein the BAP header of data packet 4 includes target routing indication information and target device identifier.
  • the UE2 decapsulates the data packet 4 to obtain the data packet 5 without the BAP header, and sends the data packet 5 to the UE1.
  • UE2 serving as a relay UE at the end of UE1 receives data packet 4, wherein the BAP header of data packet 4 includes target routing indication information, target device identification, and bearer identification.
  • UE2 decapsulates the data packet 4 to obtain a data packet without a BAP header; adds a BAP header to the data packet, generates a data packet 5, and sends the data packet 5 to UE1, wherein the BAP header of the data packet 5 is in the Contains only the bearer ID.
  • UE1 sends a data packet 1 with a BAP header to UE2, wherein the BAP header of the data packet 1 includes target routing indication information and target device identification.
  • UE1 sends a data packet 1 with a BAP header to UE2, wherein the BAP header of data packet 1 not only includes target routing indication information and target device identification, but also includes bearer identification.
  • the AN device sends the data packet 2 with a BAP header to the UE4, and the BAP header of the data packet 2 includes the target routing indication information and the target device identifier.
  • the AN device sends a data packet 2 with a BAP header to the UE4, and the BAP header of the data packet 2 includes target routing indication information and target device identification, and also includes a bearer identification.
  • UE2 sends a data packet 3 having a BAP header to UE1, and the BAP header of data packet 3 includes target routing indication information and target device identification.
  • UE2 sends a data packet 3 with a BAP header to UE1, and the BAP header of data packet 3 includes target routing indication information, target device identifier, and bearer identifier. That is, UE2 does not process the received data packet 3, and directly forwards it to UE1.
  • UE1 sends a data packet 1 with a BAP header to UE2, but the BAP header does not contain target routing indication information and target device identifiers, but only contains bearer identifiers.
  • the UE2 supplements the target routing indication information and the target device identifier into the BAP header of the data packet 1 to obtain the data packet 2.
  • the AN device sends a data packet 3 with a BAP header to the UE4, and the BAP header of the data packet 3 includes the target routing indication information and the target device identifier.
  • the AN device sends a data packet 3 with a BAP header to the UE4, and the BAP header of the data packet 3 includes the target routing indication information and the target device identification, and also includes the bearer identification.
  • UE2 serving as the last relay UE of UE1 receives data packet 4, wherein the BAP header of data packet 4 includes target routing indication information and target device identifier.
  • the UE2 decapsulates the data packet 4 to obtain the data packet 5 without the BAP header, and sends the data packet 5 to the UE1.
  • UE2 serving as a relay UE at the end of UE1 receives data packet 4, wherein the BAP header of data packet 4 includes target routing indication information, target device identification, and bearer identification.
  • UE2 deletes the target routing indication information and the target device identifier in the BAP header of the data packet 4, obtains the data packet 5, and sends the data packet 5 to the UE1, wherein the BAP header of the data packet 5 only contains the bearer identifier .
  • Link 1 the processing of the BAP header of the packet conforms to that shown in FIG. 19A or FIG. 19B.
  • the routing-related information in the above Figures 19A and 19B includes target routing indication information and target device identification.
  • Embodiment 9 is a diagrammatic representation of Embodiment 9:
  • the AN device will send at least one piece of routing information to each relay UE.
  • the following continues to take link 1 as an example for description.
  • This embodiment provides a routing information configuration method, which can be implemented by, but not limited to, the following implementations:
  • each relay UE in link 1 has a Uu communication connection (or RRC connection) with the AN device. Therefore, the AN device can use the Uu communication connection with each relay UE, respectively, to send the routing information configured for the relay UE to the relay UE.
  • the AN device can use the Uu communication connection with UE4 to send the routing information configured for it to UE4; use the Uu communication connection with UE3 to send the routing information configured for it to UE3; use the Uu communication connection with UE2 to send the routing information configured for it to UE3 UE2 sends routing information configured for it.
  • the second embodiment some relay UEs may not establish a Uu communication connection with the AN device.
  • these relay UEs refer to other relay UEs other than the relay UEs connected to the AN device through Uu communication, which may be referred to as dedicated relay UEs for short in the following.
  • the UE may not establish a Uu communication connection with the AN device.
  • the dedicated relay UE can obtain routing information from its parent relay UE, and the specific process is shown in the following figure. That is, the parent relay UE may provide routing information for the child relay UE, and optionally, may also provide the address for the child relay UE.
  • UE4 may send the routing information of UE3 to UE3, and UE3 may also send the routing information of UE2 to UE2.
  • the transmitted information includes the routing information of UE4 and at least one first extension information, and each first extension information includes the sub-relay UE (UE4) of UE4.
  • the indication information (for example, the local identifier or index) of the first sub-relay UE for short), and the routing information of the first sub-relay UE.
  • the first extension information may further include at least one second extension information, each The second extension information at least includes indication information of a second sub-relay UE and routing information of the second sub-relay UE.
  • the UE4 According to the indication information of the first sub-relay UE in each first extension information, the UE4 sends the routing information of the first sub-relay UE to the first sub-relay UE, and the information included in the first extension information Second extended information.
  • link 1 As an example to describe the configuration process of the routing information of each relay UE in the link 1.
  • UE2 and UE3 are both dedicated relay UEs.
  • S1 The AN device sends the first message to UE4.
  • the first message includes: routing information of UE4; first extended information (local identifier of UE3, routing information of UE3, second extended information (local identifier of UE2, routing information of UE2)).
  • S2 UE4 sends a second message to UE3.
  • the second message includes: routing information of UE3; second extension information (local identifier of UE2, routing information of UE2).
  • S3 UE3 sends a third message to UE2.
  • the third message includes: routing information of UE2.
  • the communication system can still complete the routing information configuration for these relay UEs, so as to realize remote UE and AN devices. Routes for communication between multiple relay UEs.
  • Embodiments 1 to 9 do not constitute a limitation of the routing method provided by the present application. Routing methods obtained by improvements and adjustments based on the above embodiments are also within the scope of the present application.
  • the above Embodiments 1 to 9 are all described by taking the U2N system as an example, however, the methods provided in the above embodiments are also applicable to the U2U system.
  • end-to-end communication occurs between two UEs, and there is at least one relay UE between the two UEs.
  • the U2U system applies the routing method provided by the embodiment of the present application, it may be set that the UE at one end performs the behavior of the AN device in the above embodiment.
  • the SL communication connection established by the two UEs is an SL unicast communication connection.
  • the present application also provides a communication device, the structure of which is shown in FIG. 20 , including a communication unit 2001 and a processing unit 2002 .
  • the communication apparatus 2000 can be applied to the multi-hop communication system as shown in FIG. 1 , and can implement the routing methods provided in the above embodiments.
  • the physical representation of the communication device 2000 may be a communication device, such as an AN device or a UE; or the communication device may be other devices capable of implementing the functions of the communication device, such as a processor inside the communication device or Chips, etc.
  • the communication device 2000 can be a field-programmable gate array (FPGA), a complex programmable logic device (CPLD), an application specific integrated circuit (application specific integrated circuits, ASIC), or some programmable chips such as System on a chip (SOC).
  • FPGA field-programmable gate array
  • CPLD complex programmable logic device
  • ASIC application specific integrated circuits
  • SOC System on a chip
  • the communication unit 2001 is used for receiving and sending data.
  • the communication unit 2001 may be implemented by a transceiver, for example, a mobile communication module.
  • the mobile communication module can provide wireless communication solutions including 2G/3G/4G/5G etc. applied to the UE.
  • the mobile communication module may include at least one antenna, at least one filter, a switch, a power amplifier, a low noise amplifier (LNA), and the like.
  • the communication device can interact with other devices in the communication system through the mobile communication module.
  • the communication apparatus 2000 may be applied to a relay terminal.
  • the specific functions of the processing unit 2002 are described below by taking the application of the communication device 2000 to the first relay terminal as an example.
  • processing unit 2002 is configured to:
  • first routing indication information and a target device identifier of the first data packet where the first routing indication information is used to indicate the transmission route of the first data packet; the target device identifier indicated by the target device identifier be the destination device or source device of the first data packet; determine the first device according to the first routing indication information, or according to the first routing indication information and the target device identifier;
  • a second data packet is transmitted to the first device through the communication unit 2001, wherein the data carried in the second data packet is the same as the data carried in the first data packet.
  • the data carried by the second data packet is the same as the data carried by the first data packet, and includes two different meanings: the first type: the first data packet and the second data packet are exactly the same, the communication
  • the apparatus 2000 does not encapsulate or decapsulate the first data packet; the second type: the second data packet and the first data packet only carry the same data, and there are differences between the two (for example, the protocol layer is different; for example, the protocol layers are the same but the information carried in a certain protocol layer header is different).
  • the communication apparatus 2000 obtains the second data packet by encapsulating or decapsulating the first data packet. In the following different designs, specific descriptions can be made for different situations.
  • the processing unit 2002 when acquiring the first routing indication information and the target device identifier, is specifically configured to:
  • Manner 1 In the case that the first data packet has a first protocol layer header, and the first protocol layer header includes the first routing indication information and the target device identifier, extract the data from the first data packet Obtain the first routing indication information and the target device identifier from the first protocol layer header of the
  • Manner 2 when the communication unit 2001 receives the first data packet from the first remote terminal, the first data packet does not have a first protocol layer header; determine that the first routing indication information is stored the routing indication information corresponding to the first remote terminal, and determine that the target device identifier is the device identifier of the first remote terminal;
  • Mode 3 When the communication unit 2001 receives the first data packet from the first remote terminal, the first data packet has a first protocol layer, and the first protocol layer header does not include the first data packet a route indication information and the target device identifier; determine that the first route indication information is the stored route indication information corresponding to the first remote terminal, and determine that the target device identifier is the first remote terminal device identification.
  • processing unit 2002 is further configured to:
  • the routing indication information corresponding to the first remote terminal from the access network device through the communication unit 2001; wherein the routing indication information corresponding to the first remote terminal is the dedicated route of the first remote terminal Indication information, or default route indication information.
  • the route indication information corresponding to the first remote terminal includes a plurality of route indication information corresponding to different bearers; the processing unit 2002, after determining the first route indication information When it is the routing indication information corresponding to the first remote terminal, it is specifically used for:
  • the first routing indication information is: in the routing indication information corresponding to the first remote terminal, the routing indication information that has a corresponding relationship with the target bearer.
  • the first routing indication information includes a destination address; the first data packet has a first protocol layer header;
  • the processing unit 2002 when determining the first device according to the first routing indication information or according to the first routing indication information and the target device identifier, is specifically configured to:
  • Manner 1 when the destination address is different from the address of the first relay terminal, determine the address of the next hop node corresponding to the first routing indication information; determine that the first device is the next hop node the next hop node indicated by the address;
  • Mode 2 when the destination address is the same as the address of the first relay terminal, determine that the device indicated by the target device identifier is the first device;
  • Mode 3 When the destination address is the same as the address of the first relay terminal, and the first relay terminal is the first relay terminal connected to the access network device, determine to receive the first data The interface used by the package; when the interface is a Uu interface, determine that the device indicated by the target device identifier is the first device; when the interface is a PC5 interface, determine that the first device is the first device access network equipment.
  • the processing unit 2002 does not perform encapsulation or decapsulation processing on the first data packet, but directly forwards the first data packet.
  • the first routing indication information further includes a target path identifier.
  • the first routing indication information includes a target path identifier; the first data packet has the first protocol layer header;
  • the processing unit 2002 when determining the first device according to the first routing indication information or according to the first routing indication information and the target device identifier, is specifically configured to:
  • Manner 1 when the first routing indication information has a corresponding next-hop node device identifier, determine the first device according to the next-hop node device identifier;
  • Manner 2 when the first routing indication information does not have a corresponding next-hop node device identifier, determine that the device indicated by the target device identifier is the first device.
  • the processing unit 2002 when determining the first device according to the device identifier of the next-hop node, is specifically configured to:
  • Manner 1 when the device identifier of the next-hop node indicates a second relay terminal connected to the first relay terminal, determine that the first device is the second relay terminal;
  • Manner 3 when the next-hop node device identifier indicates the first relay terminal, determine that the device indicated by the target device identifier is the first device.
  • next-hop node device identification when the next-hop node device identification is a first default device identification, the next-hop node device identification indicates the first relay terminal;
  • next-hop node device identification When the next-hop node device identification is the second default device identification, the next-hop node device identification indicates the access network device.
  • the processing unit 2002 does not perform encapsulation or decapsulation processing on the first data packet, but directly forwards the first data packet.
  • the first routing indication information further includes a transmission direction indication, where the transmission direction indication is used to indicate uplink transmission or downlink transmission.
  • the processing unit 2002 when determining that the device indicated by the target device identifier is the first device, the processing unit 2002 is specifically configured to:
  • the target device identifier indicates a first remote terminal accessing the first relay terminal, determining that the first device is the first remote terminal;
  • processing unit 2002 transmits the second data packet to the first device through the communication unit 2001, it is specifically configured to:
  • the second data packet is transmitted to the first remote terminal through the communication unit 2001 .
  • the first protocol layer header further includes a bearer identifier, where the bearer identifier is used to indicate a target bearer used for transmitting the first data packet; the processing unit 2002, after determining the When the device indicated by the target device identifier is the first device, it is specifically used for:
  • the target device identifier indicates a first remote terminal accessing the first relay terminal, determining that the first device is the first remote terminal;
  • processing unit 2002 transmits the second data packet to the first device through the communication unit 2001, it is specifically configured to:
  • Manner 1 Delete the first routing indication information and the target device identifier contained in the first protocol layer in the first data packet to obtain the second data packet, the first data packet in the second data packet.
  • a protocol layer header includes the bearer identifier; the second data packet is transmitted to the first device through the communication unit 2001;
  • Method 2 Decapsulate the first data packet to obtain a target data packet; wherein, the target data packet does not have a first protocol layer header; add a first protocol layer header to the target data packet to generate the target data packet.
  • the second data packet wherein the first protocol layer header of the second data packet includes the bearer identifier; the second data packet is transmitted to the first device through the communication unit 2001;
  • Manner 3 The second data packet that is the same as the first data packet is transmitted to the first device through the communication unit 2001 . That is, the processing unit 2002 does not perform encapsulation or decapsulation processing on the first data packet, but directly forwards the first data packet.
  • processing unit 2002 is also used for:
  • the target device identifier indicates the first relay terminal, it is determined that the data carried in the first data packet is the data of the first relay terminal.
  • the target device identification when the target device identification is a third default device identification, the target device identification indicates the first relay terminal.
  • the processing unit 2002 transmits the second data packet to the first device through the communication unit 2001 , specifically for:
  • a first protocol layer header is added to the first data packet to generate the second data packet; wherein the first protocol layer header of the second data packet includes the first routing indication information and the target device identification;
  • the second data packet is transmitted to the first device through the communication unit 2001 .
  • the processing unit 2002 when the first relay terminal is connected to the access network device through the second relay terminal, the processing unit 2002 is further configured to:
  • Mode 1 transmit the third data packet to the second relay terminal through the communication unit 2001;
  • Method 2 Determine the second routing indication information of the third data packet; add a first protocol layer header to the third data packet to generate a fourth data packet; and send the second data packet through the communication unit 2001
  • the relay terminal transmits the fourth data packet; wherein, the first protocol layer header of the fourth data packet includes the second routing indication information and the device identifier of the first relay terminal.
  • the device identifier of the first relay terminal is allocated by the second relay terminal to the first relay terminal; or, the device identifier of the first relay terminal is The first relay terminal is allocated by the second relay terminal; or the device identifier of the first relay terminal is the first default device identifier.
  • the processing unit 2002 when the processing unit 2002 transmits the second data packet to the first device through the communication unit 2001, it is specifically configured to:
  • processing unit 2002 transmits the third data packet to the second relay terminal through the communication unit 2001, it is specifically configured to:
  • the first logical channel is different from the second logical channel.
  • the processing unit 2002 transmits the second data packet to the first device through the communication unit 2001, it is specifically configured to:
  • the second data packet is obtained in the following two ways:
  • Method 1 Add the first routing indication information and the target device identifier to the first protocol layer header of the first data packet to obtain the second data packet, the first data packet in the second data packet.
  • a protocol layer header includes the bearer identifier, the first routing indication information and the target device identifier;
  • Method 2 Decapsulate the first data packet to obtain a target data packet; wherein, the target data packet does not have a first protocol layer header; add a first protocol layer header to the target data packet to generate the target data packet a second data packet, wherein the first protocol layer header of the second data packet includes the bearer identifier, the first routing indication information, and the target device identifier;
  • the second data packet is transmitted to the first device through the communication unit 2001 .
  • the processing unit 2002 when determining the address of the next hop node corresponding to the first routing indication information, is specifically configured to:
  • the target routing information determine target routing information that includes the first routing indication information; wherein the target routing information includes the first routing indication information and the next route corresponding to the first routing indication information jump node address;
  • the address of the next hop node corresponding to the first routing indication information is determined in the target routing information.
  • processing unit 2002 is further configured to:
  • the target routing information including the first routing indication information is determined in the stored at least one routing information, it is determined that the first routing indication information has a corresponding next-hop node device identifier; wherein, the target routing information Including the first routing indication information and the next hop node device identifier corresponding to the first routing indication information;
  • the target routing information is not found in the stored at least one routing information, it is determined that the first routing indication information does not have a corresponding next-hop node device identifier.
  • processing unit 2002 is further configured to:
  • the second relay terminal acquires the at least one routing information.
  • the target device identification is the local identification local ID of the target device or the layer 2 identification L2 ID.
  • processing unit 2002 is configured to:
  • a first data packet is received by the communication unit 2001, wherein the first data packet has a first protocol layer header, the first protocol layer header includes first routing indication information and a target device identifier, the first protocol layer header Route indication information is used to indicate the transmission route of the first data packet; the target device indicated by the target device identifier is the destination device or the source device of the first data packet;
  • the first data packet is transmitted to the first device through the communication unit 2001 .
  • the first route indication information includes the address of the target node; the processing unit 2002, according to the first route indication information, or according to the first route indication information and the target device
  • the identifier when determining the first device, is specifically used for:
  • Manner 1 when the address of the target node is different from the address of the first relay terminal, determine the address of the next hop node corresponding to the first routing indication information; determine that the first device is the next hop The next hop node indicated by the node address;
  • Mode 2 when the address of the target node is the same as the address of the first relay terminal, determine that the device indicated by the target device identifier is the first device;
  • Mode 3 When the address of the target node is the same as the address of the first relay terminal, and the first relay terminal is the first relay terminal connected to the access network device, the first relay The terminal determines the interface used to receive the first data packet; when the interface is a Uu interface, determine that the device indicated by the target device identifier is the first device; when the interface is a PC5 interface, determine The first device is the access network device.
  • the first routing indication information further includes a target path identifier.
  • the processing unit 2002 when determining that the device indicated by the target device identifier is the first device, the processing unit 2002 is specifically configured to:
  • the target device identifier indicates a first remote terminal accessing the first relay terminal, it is determined that the first device is the first remote terminal.
  • the processing unit 2002 is further configured to, when the target device identifier indicates the first relay terminal, determine that the data carried in the first data packet is the first intermediate following the terminal data.
  • the target device identification when the target device identification is a default device identification, the target device identification indicates the first relay terminal.
  • the processing unit 2002 when determining the address of the next hop node corresponding to the first routing indication information, is specifically configured to:
  • the target routing information determine target routing information that includes the first routing indication information; wherein the target routing information includes the first routing indication information and the next route corresponding to the first routing indication information jump node address;
  • the address of the next hop node corresponding to the first routing indication information is determined in the target routing information.
  • processing unit 2002 is also used for:
  • the second relay terminal acquires the at least one routing information.
  • the target device identification is the local identification local ID of the target device.
  • the first protocol layer header of the first data packet further includes a bearer identifier; the bearer identifier is used to indicate the first bearer used for transmitting the first data packet.
  • the communication apparatus 2000 may also be applied to an AN device.
  • the specific functions of the processing unit 2002 will be described below.
  • the processing unit 2002 is used for:
  • a first protocol layer header is added to the first data packet to generate a second data packet; wherein the first protocol layer header of the second data packet includes the first routing indication information and the first target device identification;
  • the second data packet is transmitted to the relay terminal through the communication unit 2001 .
  • processing unit 2002 is also used for:
  • the third data packet sent by the relay terminal is received by the communication unit 2001; wherein, the third data packet has a first protocol layer header, and the first protocol layer header of the third data packet includes a second Routing indication information and a second target device identifier; the second target device indicated by the second target device identifier is the source device of the third data packet, and the second routing indication information is used to indicate the third data packet packet transmission route;
  • processing unit 2002 is further configured to:
  • the first bearer identifier is used to indicate a first bearer used for transmitting the first data packet
  • the first protocol layer header of the second data packet further includes the first bearer identifier.
  • the first protocol layer header of the third data packet further includes a second bearer identifier, where the second bearer identifier is used to indicate the second bearer used for transmitting the third data packet .
  • the communication apparatus 2000 may also be applied to a remote terminal.
  • the specific functions of the processing unit 2002 will be described below.
  • the processing unit 2002 is used for:
  • the first route indication information of the first data packet is used to indicate the transmission route of the first data packet;
  • the target device identifier is the the equipment identification of the remote terminal;
  • a first protocol layer header is added to the first data packet to generate a second data packet; wherein, the first protocol layer header of the second data packet includes the first routing indication information, the first target device identification;
  • the second data packet is sent to the relay terminal through the communication unit 2001 .
  • processing unit 2002 is also used for:
  • the communication unit 2001 receives a third data packet from the relay terminal, wherein the third data packet has a first protocol layer header, and the first protocol layer header of the third data packet includes a second routing indication information and the target device identifier; the second routing indication information is used to indicate the transmission route of the second data packet;
  • processing unit 2002 is also used for:
  • the first bearer identifier is used to indicate a first bearer used for transmitting the first data packet
  • the first protocol layer header of the second data packet further includes the first bearer identifier.
  • the first protocol layer header of the third data packet further includes a second bearer identifier, where the second bearer identifier is used to indicate the second bearer used for transmitting the third data packet .
  • the processing unit 2002 when determining the first routing indication information of the first data packet, is specifically configured to:
  • the first routing indication information is the stored routing indication information corresponding to the first remote terminal.
  • processing unit 2002 is also used for:
  • the communication unit 2001 receives the routing indication information corresponding to the first remote terminal from the access network device or the relay terminal, where the routing indication information corresponding to the first remote terminal is the first remote terminal.
  • the integrated unit if implemented in the form of a software functional unit and sold or used as an independent product, may be stored in a computer-readable storage medium.
  • the technical solutions of the present application can be embodied in the form of software products in essence, or the parts that contribute to the prior art, or all or part of the technical solutions, and the computer software products are stored in a storage medium , including several instructions for causing a computer device (which may be a personal computer, a server, or a network device, etc.) or a processor (processor) to execute all or part of the steps of the methods described in the various embodiments of the present application.
  • the aforementioned storage medium includes: U disk, mobile hard disk, read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), random access memory (Random Access Memory, RAM), magnetic disk or optical disk and other media that can store program codes .
  • the present application also provides a communication device.
  • the communication device can be applied to the multi-hop communication system as shown in FIG. 1 , and can implement the routing method provided by the above embodiment. function of the communication device 2000.
  • the communication device 2100 includes: a transceiver 2101 , a processor 2102 and a memory 2103 .
  • the transceiver 2101, the processor 2102 and the memory 2103 are connected to each other.
  • the transceiver 2101 , the processor 2102 and the memory 2103 are connected to each other through a bus 2104 .
  • the bus 2104 may be a peripheral component interconnect standard (peripheral component interconnect, PCI) bus or an extended industry standard architecture (extended industry standard architecture, EISA) bus or the like.
  • PCI peripheral component interconnect
  • EISA extended industry standard architecture
  • the bus can be divided into an address bus, a data bus, a control bus, and the like. For ease of presentation, only one thick line is shown in FIG. 21, but it does not mean that there is only one bus or one type of bus.
  • the transceiver 2101 is used for receiving and sending data, and realizing communication interaction with other devices.
  • the communication device 2100 may be a relay terminal.
  • the specific function of the processor 2102 is described below by taking the application of the communication device 2100 to the first relay terminal as an example.
  • the processor 2102 is configured to:
  • first routing indication information and a target device identifier of the first data packet where the first routing indication information is used to indicate the transmission route of the first data packet; the target device identifier indicated by the target device identifier be the destination device or source device of the first data packet; determine the first device according to the first routing indication information, or according to the first routing indication information and the target device identifier;
  • a second data packet is transmitted to the first device through the transceiver 2101, wherein the data carried by the second data packet is the same as the data carried by the first data packet.
  • processor 2102 is configured to:
  • a first data packet is received by the transceiver 2101, wherein the first data packet has a first protocol layer header, the first protocol layer header includes first routing indication information and a target device identifier, and the first protocol layer header Route indication information is used to indicate the transmission route of the first data packet; the target device indicated by the target device identifier is the destination device or the source device of the first data packet;
  • the first data packet is transmitted to the first device through the transceiver 2101 .
  • the communication device 2100 may also be applied to an AN device.
  • the specific functions of the processor 2102 will be described below.
  • processor 2102 for:
  • a first protocol layer header is added to the first data packet to generate a second data packet; wherein the first protocol layer header of the second data packet includes the first routing indication information and the first target device identification;
  • the second data packet is transmitted to the relay terminal through the transceiver 2101 .
  • the communication device 2100 may also be applied to a remote terminal.
  • the specific functions of the processor 2102 will be described below.
  • processor 2102 for:
  • the first route indication information of the first data packet is used to indicate the transmission route of the first data packet;
  • the target device identifier is the the equipment identification of the remote terminal;
  • a first protocol layer header is added to the first data packet to generate a second data packet; wherein, the first protocol layer header of the second data packet includes the first routing indication information, the first target device identification;
  • the second data packet is sent to the relay terminal through the transceiver 2101 .
  • this embodiment does not describe the specific functions of the processor 2102 in detail.
  • the specific functions of the processor 2102 reference may be made to the descriptions in the above embodiments and the routing methods provided in the examples, and the implementation shown in FIG. 20 .
  • the specific function description of the communication device 2000 in the example will not be repeated here.
  • the memory 2103 is used to store program instructions and data.
  • the program instructions may include program code, and the program code includes computer operation instructions.
  • the memory 2103 may include random access memory (RAM), and may also include non-volatile memory (non-volatile memory), such as at least one disk storage.
  • the processor 2102 executes the program instructions stored in the memory 2103, and uses the data stored in the memory 2103 to implement the above-mentioned functions, thereby realizing the routing methods provided by the above-mentioned embodiments.
  • the memory 2103 in FIG. 21 of the present application may be a volatile memory or a non-volatile memory, or may include both volatile and non-volatile memory.
  • the non-volatile memory may be a read-only memory (Read-Only Memory, ROM), a programmable read-only memory (Programmable ROM, PROM), an erasable programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM), an electrically programmable read-only memory (Erasable PROM, EPROM). Erase programmable read-only memory (Electrically EPROM, EEPROM) or flash memory.
  • Volatile memory may be Random Access Memory (RAM), which acts as an external cache.
  • RAM Static RAM
  • DRAM Dynamic RAM
  • SDRAM Synchronous DRAM
  • SDRAM double data rate synchronous dynamic random access memory
  • Double Data Rate SDRAM DDR SDRAM
  • enhanced SDRAM ESDRAM
  • synchronous link dynamic random access memory Synchlink DRAM, SLDRAM
  • Direct Rambus RAM Direct Rambus RAM
  • the embodiments of the present application further provide a computer program, which when the computer program runs on a computer, causes the computer to execute the routing method provided by the above embodiments.
  • the embodiments of the present application further provide a computer-readable storage medium, where a computer program is stored in the computer-readable storage medium, and when the computer program is executed by a computer, the computer executes the routing provided by the above embodiments. method.
  • the storage medium may be any available medium that the computer can access.
  • computer readable media may include RAM, ROM, EEPROM, CD-ROM or other optical disk storage, magnetic disk storage media or other magnetic storage devices, or be capable of carrying or storing instructions or data structures in the form of desired program code and any other medium that can be accessed by a computer.
  • the embodiments of the present application further provide a chip, where the chip is used to read a computer program stored in a memory to implement the routing methods provided by the above embodiments.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a chip system, where the chip system includes a processor for supporting a computer apparatus to implement the functions involved in the communication devices in the above embodiments.
  • the chip system further includes a memory for storing necessary programs and data of the computer device.
  • the chip system may be composed of chips, or may include chips and other discrete devices.
  • the embodiments of the present application provide a routing method and device.
  • the method can use the address of the relay UE, the address of the remote UE, the address of the AN device, or the routing identifier as routing indication information to guide data.
  • the routing transmission of packets can ensure the routing between the AN device and the remote UE in the multi-hop communication scenario.
  • the embodiments of the present application may be provided as a method, a system, or a computer program product. Accordingly, the present application may take the form of an entirely hardware embodiment, an entirely software embodiment, or an embodiment combining software and hardware aspects. Furthermore, the present application may take the form of a computer program product embodied on one or more computer-usable storage media (including, but not limited to, disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.) having computer-usable program code embodied therein.
  • computer-usable storage media including, but not limited to, disk storage, CD-ROM, optical storage, etc.
  • These computer program instructions may also be stored in a computer-readable memory capable of directing a computer or other programmable data processing apparatus to function in a particular manner, such that the instructions stored in the computer-readable memory result in an article of manufacture comprising instruction means, the instructions
  • the apparatus implements the functions specified in the flow or flow of the flowcharts and/or the block or blocks of the block diagrams.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
  • Data Exchanges In Wide-Area Networks (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

本申请公开了一种路由方法及装置，该方法及装置可以应用于多跳通信场景，但也可以用于其他场景中。特别的，该方法及装置用于在多跳通信场景中实现AN设备与远端UE之间的路由。在该方法中，通信链路中的中继终端可以通过数据包的路由指示信息，或者数据包的路由指示信息和目标设备标识，来确定传输对象，从而将数据包中承载的数据传输给传输对象。显然，该方法可以通过路由指导信息来指导数据包的路由传输，从而可以保证在多跳通信场景中实现AN设备与远端UE之间的路由。

Description

一种路由方法及装置 技术领域
本申请涉及通信技术领域，尤其涉及一种路由方法及装置。
背景技术
终端设备到网络中继(UE-to-network relay，U2N)技术是一种能够有效提升小区覆盖的技术。在U2N系统中包含接入网(access network，AN)设备，以及两类终端设备：中继UE(relay UE)和远端UE(remote UE)。中继UE可以帮助远端UE接入所述AN设备以获取服务。例如，在下行方向，中继UE可以从AN设备获取远端UE的下行数据，并将该下行数据转发给远端UE；在上行方向，中继UE获取远端UE的上行数据后，将该上行数据转发给AN设备。
目前，考虑到中继UE可以同时为多个远端UE提供中继服务，为了使中继UE在进行数据传输时，能够明确的区分每个远端UE，中继UE可以为每个远端UE分配一个本地标识(local ID)。本地标识可以在该中继UE范围内唯一识别一个远端UE。这样，UE-to-network relay系统可以在需要传输的数据包中添加远端UE的本地标识从而实现AN设备与远端UE之间的路由。以下行传输方向为例，AN设备可以在需要向目标远端UE发送的数据包中添加该目标远端UE的本地标识，中继UE在从AN设备获取该数据包后，可以根据该目标远端UE的本地标识，确定该数据包的目的设备为该目标远端UE，从而将该数据包发送给所述目标远端UE。
然而，在复杂的多跳U2N系统中，如何完成AN设备与通过多跳中继UE连接基站的这些远端UE之间的路由，是亟需解决的问题。
发明内容
本申请提供一种路由方法及装置，该方法及装置可以应用于多跳通信场景，但也可以用于其他场景中。特别的，该方法及装置用于在多跳通信场景中实现AN设备与远端UE之间的路由。
第一方面，本申请实施例提供了一种路由方法，应用于第一中继终端中。其中，该方法可以由所述第一中继终端执行，或者由第一中继终端内的芯片、处理器或芯片系统等部件执行。下面该方法由第一中继终端执行为例，对该方法进行具体说明，该方法以下步骤：
第一中继终端接收第一数据包之后，获取所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息和目标设备标识，其中，所述第一路由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；所述目标设备标识所指示的目标设备为所述第一数据包的目的设备或源设备；所述第一中继终端根据所述第一路由指示信息，或者根据所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，确定第一设备；所述第一中继终端向所述第一设备传输第二数据包，其中，所述第二数据包承载的数据与所述第一数据包承载数据相同。
通过该方法，所述第一中继终端可以根据接收的第一数据包的第一路由指示信息，并结合第一数据包的目标设备标识，来确定传输对象，从而将第一数据包中的数据传输给该传输对象。显然，该方法可以通过路由指示信息，或者路由指示信息和目标设备标识来指 导数据包的路由传输，从而可以保证在多跳通信场景中实现AN设备与远端UE之间的路由。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一中继终端可以通过以下方式，获取所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识：
方式一：所述第一数据包具有第一协议层头，所述第一协议层头中包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；从所述第一数据包的第一协议层头中获取所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；
方式二：在从第一远端终端接收所述第一数据包的情况下，所述第一数据包不具有第一协议层头；确定所述第一路由指示信息为保存的所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息，并确定所述目标设备标识为所述第一远端终端的设备标识；
方式三：在从第一远端终端接收所述第一数据包的情况下，所述第一数据包具有第一协议层，且第一协议层头中不包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；确定所述第一路由指示信息为保存的所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息，并确定所述目标设备标识为所述第一远端终端的设备标识。
通过方式一，在第一数据包具有第一协议层头的情况下，所述第一中继终端可以直接在第一数据包的第一协议层头中获取第一路由指示信息和目标设备标识；通过方式二或方式三，在所述第一中继终端为末尾中继终端，从第一远端终端接收第一数据包的场景中，在该情况下，所述第一中继终端可以根据所述第一远端终端，确定所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识。通过本设计，所述第一中继终端可以在多种情况和场景下，均能够获取所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一中继终端还可以从接入网设备获取所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息；其中，所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息为所述第一远端终端的专用路由指示信息，或者默认路由指示信息。这样，当所述第一中继终端在接收到所述第一远端终端的数据包时，可以获取该数据包的路由指示信息。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息中包含多个与不同承载存在对应关系的路由指示信息；在该情况下，所述第一中继终端可以通过以下步骤，确定所述第一路由指示信息为所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息：
确定传输所述第一数据包所使用的目标承载；确定所述第一路由指示信息为：在所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息中的，与所述目标承载存在对应关系的路由指示信息。
通过本设计，通信系统可以以承载为粒度为第一远端终端分配多个路由指示信息；并根据传输第一远端终端的第一数据包所使用的承载，确定第一路由指示信息。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一路由指示信息包含目的地址；所述第一数据包具有第一协议层头；在该情况下，所述第一中继终端可以通过以下方式，确定所述第一设备：
方式一：当所述目的地址与所述第一中继终端的地址不同时，确定所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址；确定所述第一设备为所述下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点；
方式二：当所述目的地址与所述第一中继终端的地址相同时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备；
方式三：当所述目的地址与所述第一中继终端的地址相同，且所述第一中继终端为连接接入网设备的第一个中继终端时，确定接收所述第一数据包所使用的接口；当所述接口 为Uu接口时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备；当所述接口为PC5接口时，确定所述第一设备为所述接入网设备。
在本设计提供的方法中，可以将以中继终端的地址作为路由指示信息来指导数据包的路由传输，从而可以保证在多跳通信场景中实现AN设备与远端UE之间的路由。
在一种可能的设计中，当所述第一设备为所述下一跳节点或所述接入网设备时，所述第二数据包与所述第一数据包相同。
通过本设计，所述第一中继设备可以在确定传输对象为下一跳节点或接入网设备时，将第一数据包传输给确定的传输对象。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一路由指示信息还包含目标路径标识。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一路由指示信息包含目标路径标识；所述第一数据包具有所述第一协议层头；在该情况下，所述第一中继终端可以通过以下方式，确定所述第一设备：
方式一：当所述第一路由指示信息存在对应的下一跳节点设备标识时，根据所述下一跳节点设备标识，确定所述第一设备；
方式二：当所述第一路由指示信息不存在对应的下一跳节点设备标识时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备。
通过该设计，所述第一中继终端可以在第一路由指示信息是否存在对应的下一跳节点设备标识的不同情况下，采用不同的方式确定传输对象。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一中继终端可以通过以下方式，根据所述下一跳节点设备标识，确定所述第一设备：
方式一：当所述下一跳节点设备标识指示所述第一中继终端连接的第二中继终端时，确定所述第一设备为所述第二中继终端；
方式二：当所述下一跳节点设备标识指示接入网设备时，确定所述第一设备为所述接入网设备；
方式三：当所述下一跳节点设备标识指示所述第一中继终端时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备。
通过本设计，所述第一中继终端可以在下一跳节点设备标识指示不同通信设备时，确定不同的传输对象。
在一种可能的设计中，所述下一跳节点设备标识为第一默认设备标识时，所述下一跳节点设备标识指示所述第一中继终端；所述下一跳节点设备标识为第二默认设备标识时，所述下一跳节点设备标识指示所述接入网设备。
在一种可能的设计中，当所述第一设备为所述第二中继终端或所述接入网设备时，所述第二数据包与所述第一数据包相同。
通过本设计，所述第一中继设备可以在确定传输对象为其连接的第二中继终端或接入网设备时，将第一数据包传输给确定的传输对象。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一路由指示信息还包含传输方向指示，所述传输方向指示用于指示上行传输或下行传输。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一中继设备可以通过以下步骤，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备：当所述目标设备标识指示接入所述第一中继终端的第一远端终端时，确定所述第一设备为所述第一远端终端。在该情况下，所述第一中继终端可以 通过以下步骤，向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包：
对所述第一数据包进行解封装，得到所述第二数据包，其中，所述第二数据包不具有第一协议层头；向所述第一远端终端传输所述第二数据包。
通过该设计，所述第一中继终端可以将不具有协议层头的数据包传输给第一远端终端。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一协议层头中还包含承载标识，所述承载标识用于指示传输所述第一数据包所使用的目标承载；所述第一中继设备可以通过以下步骤，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备：当所述目标设备标识指示接入所述第一中继终端的第一远端终端时，确定所述第一设备为所述第一远端终端。在该情况下，所述第一中继终端可以通过以下方式，向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包：
方式一：对所述第一数据包中所述第一协议层中包含的第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识删除，得到所述第二数据包，所述第二数据包中的第一协议层头中包含所述承载标识；向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包；
方式二：对所述第一数据包进行解封装，得到目标数据包；其中，所述目标数据包不具有第一协议层头；为所述目标数据包进行添加第一协议层头，生成所述第二数据包，其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述承载标识；向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包；
方式三：向所述第一设备传输与所述第一数据包相同的所述第二数据包。
通过方式一和方式二，所述第一中继终端可以向第一设备传输第一协议层头仅包含承载标识的第二数据包。通过方式三，所述第一中继终端可以向所述第一设备传输所述第一数据包。
在一种可能的设计中，当所述目标设备标识指示所述第一中继终端时，所述第一中继终端还可以确定所述第一数据包中承载的数据为所述第一中继终端的数据。
在一种可能的设计中，当所述目标设备标识为第三默认设备标识时，所述目标设备标识指示所述第一中继终端。
在一种可能的设计中，当所述第一数据包不具有第一协议层头时，所述第一中继终端可以通过以下步骤，向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包：
为所述第一数据包添加第一协议层头，生成所述第二数据包；其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包。
通过该设计，所述第一中继终端可以向第一设备传输携带第一协议层头的第二数据包。
在一种可能的设计中，在所述第一中继终端通过第二中继终端连接接入网设备的情况下，所述第一中继终端还可以生成第三数据包，其中，所述第三数据包不包含第一协议层头；并向所述第二中继终端传输所述第三数据包；或者通过以下步骤，生成第四数据包，向所述第二中继终端传输第四数据包：
确定所述第三数据包的第二路由指示信息；为所述第三数据包添加第一协议层头，生成第四数据包；其中，所述第四数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述第二路由指示信息和所述第一中继终端的设备标识。
通过该设计，所述第一中继终端可以向第二中继终端传输自身的携带第一协议层头的数据包，或者不携带第一协议层头的数据包。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一中继终端的设备标识为所述第二中继终端为所述第一 中继终端分配的；或者，所述第一中继终端的设备标识为所述第一中继终端为所述第二中继终端分配的；或者所述第一中继终端的设备标识为第一默认设备标识。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一中继终端可以使用第一逻辑信道，向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包；所述第一中继设备可以使用第二逻辑信道，向所述第二中继终端传输所述第三数据包；其中，所述第一逻辑信道与所述第二逻辑信道不同。
通过该设计，所述第一中继终端可以使用不同的逻辑信道，分别传输携带第一协议层头的数据包和不携带第一协议层头的数据包，以通过逻辑信道对数据包的类型进行区分，从而使传输对象可以按照逻辑信道对接收的数据包进行差异化处理。
在一种可能的设计中，当所述第一数据包具有第一协议层头，且第一协议层头中包含承载标识、不包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识时，所述第一中继终端可以通过以下方式，得到所述第二数据包：
方式一：将所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识添加到所述第一数据包的第一协议层头中，得到所述第二数据包，所述第二数据包中的第一协议层头中包含所述承载标识、所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；
方式二：对所述第一数据包进行解封装，得到目标数据包；其中，所述目标数据包不具有第一协议层头；为所述目标数据包添加第一协议层头，生成所述第二数据包，其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述承载标识、所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识。
通过该设计，所述第一中继终端可以向第一设备传输第一协议层中头包含第一路由指示信息和目标设备标识的第二数据包，以使第一设备继续根据第一路由指示信息和目标设备标识传输所述第二数据包。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一中继终端可以通过以下步骤，确定所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址，包括：
在保存的至少一个路由信息中，确定包含所述第一路由指示信息的目标路由信息；其中，所述目标路由信息包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址；在所述目标路由信息中确定所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址。
通过该设计，所述第一中继终端可以根据保存的路由信息，确定所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址。
在一种可能的设计中，当在保存的至少一个路由信息中，所述第一中继终端可以在确定包含所述第一路由指示信息的目标路由信息时，确定所述第一路由指示信息存在对应的下一跳节点设备标识；其中，所述目标路由信息包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点设备标识；或者当在保存的所述至少一个路由信息中，所述第一中继终端可以在未查找到所述目标路由信息时，确定所述第一路由指示信息不存在对应的下一跳节点设备标识。
通过该设计，所述第一中继终端可以根据是否查找到该目标路由信息，确定所述第一路由指示信息是否存在下一跳节点设备标识。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一中继终端可以通过以下方式，获取所述至少一个路由信息：
方式一：从接入网设备获取所述至少一个路由信息；
方式二：在所述第一中继终端通过第二中继终端连接接入网设备的情况下，从所述第 二中继终端获取所述至少一个路由信息。
通过本设计，通信系统可以灵活地对第一中继终端的路由信息进行配置。
在一种可能的设计中，所述目标设备标识为所述目标设备的本地标识(local ID)或层2标识(L2 ID)。
第二方面，本申请实施例提供了一种路由方法，应用于接入网设备中。其中，该方法可以由所述接入网设备执行，或者由接入网设备内的芯片、处理器或芯片系统等部件执行。下面该方法由接入网设备执行为例，对该方法进行具体说明，该方法以下步骤：
接入网设备获取第一数据包，所述第一数据包不具有第一协议层头；所述接入网设备确定所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息和第一目标设备标识，其中，所述第一目标设备标识所指示的第一目标设备为所述第一数据包的目的设备，所述第一路由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；所述接入网设备为所述第一数据包添加第一协议层头，生成第二数据包；其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述第一目标设备标识；所述接入网设备根据所述第一路由指示信息，确定中继终端，并向所述中继终端传输第二数据包。
通过该方法，所述接入网设备可以根据第一数据包的第一路由指示信息，确定传输对象，从而将第一数据包中的数据传输给该传输对象。显然，接入网设备可以通过路由指示信息来指导数据包的路由传输，从而可以保证在多跳通信场景中实现AN设备到远端UE之间的路由。
在一种可能的设计中，所述接入网设备还可以接收所述中继终端发送的第三数据包；其中，所述第三数据包具有第一协议层头，所述第三数据包的第一协议层头中包含第二路由指示信息和第二目标设备标识；所述第二目标设备标识所指示的第二目标设备为所述第三数据包的源设备，所述第二路由指示信息用于指示所述第三数据包的传输路由；所述接入网设备对所述第三数据包进行解封装，得到第四数据包，所述第四数据包不具有第一协议层头。
在一种可能的设计中，所述接入网设备还可以确定所述第一数据包的第一承载标识；其中，所述第一承载标识用于指示传输所述第一数据包所使用的第一承载；所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中还包含所述第一承载标识。
通过本设计，所述接入网设备传输的第二数据包的第一协议层头中还包含第一承载标识。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第三数据包的第一协议层头中还包含第二承载标识，所述第二承载标识用于指示传输所述第三数据包所使用的第二承载。
第三方面，本申请实施例提供了一种路由方法，应用于远端终端中。其中，该方法可以由所述远端终端执行，或者由远端终端内的芯片、处理器或芯片系统等部件执行。下面该方法由远端终端执行为例，对该方法进行具体说明，该方法以下步骤：
远端终端获取第一数据包后，确定所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息、目标设备标识，所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；所述目标设备标识为所述远端终端的设备标识；所述远端终端为所述第一数据包添加第一协议层头，生成第二数据包；其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述第一路由指示信息、所述第一目标设备标识；所述远端终端向中继终端发送所述第二数据包。
通过该方法，所述远端终端可以将协议层头中包含第一数据包的第一路由指示信息和 目标设备标识的第二数据包传输给该中继终端，以使中继终端能够根据所述第一路由指示信息并结合目标设备标识来确定传输对象。显然，远端终端可以通过路由指示信息来指导数据包的路由传输，从而可以保证在多跳通信场景中实现远端UE到AN设备之间的路由。
在一种可能的设计中，所述远端终端还可以接收来自所述中继终端的第三数据包，其中，所述第三数据包具有第一协议层头，所述第三数据包的第一协议层头中包含第二路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；所述第二路由指示信息用于指示所述第二数据包的传输路由；所述远端终端对所述第三数据包进行解封装，得到第四数据包，所述第四数据包不具有第一协议层头。
在一种可能的设计中，所述远端终端还可以确定所述第一数据包的第一承载标识；其中，所述第一承载标识用于指示传输所述第一数据包所使用的第一承载；所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中还包含所述第一承载标识。
通过本设计，所述远端终端传输的第二数据包的第一协议层头中还包含第一承载标识。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第三数据包的第一协议层头中还包含第二承载标识，所述第二承载标识用于指示传输所述第三数据包所使用的第二承载。
在一种可能的设计中，所述远端终端可以确定所述第一路由指示信息为保存的所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息。
在一种可能的设计中，所述远端终端可以从接入网设备或所述中继终端接收使所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息，所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息为所述第一远端终端的专用路由指示信息，或者默认的路由指示信息。
第四方面，本申请实施例提供了一种路由方法，应用于第一中继终端中。其中，该方法可以由所述第一中继终端执行，或者由第一中继终端内的芯片、处理器或芯片系统等部件执行。下面该方法由第一中继终端执行为例，对该方法进行具体说明，该方法以下步骤：
第一中继终端接收第一数据包，其中，所述第一数据包中具有第一协议层头，所述第一协议层头中包含第一路由指示信息和目标设备标识，所述第一路由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；所述目标设备标识所指示的目标设备为所述第一数据包的目的设备或源设备；所述第一中继终端从所述第一数据包中获取所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；并根据所述第一路由指示信息，或者根据所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，确定第一设备；所述第一中继终端向所述第一设备传输所述第一数据包。
通过该方法，所述第一中继终端可以根据接收的第一数据包的第一路由指示信息，并结合第一数据包的目标设备标识，来确定传输对象，从而将第一数据包传输给该传输对象。显然，该方法可以通过路由指示信息，或者路由指示和目标设备标识来指导数据包的路由传输，从而可以保证在多跳通信场景中实现AN设备与远端UE之间的路由。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一路由指示信息包含目标节点地址；在该情况下，所述第一中继终端可以通过以下方式，确定所述第一设备：
方式一：当所述目标节点地址与所述第一中继终端的地址不同时，确定所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址；确定所述第一设备为所述下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点；
方式二：当所述目标节点地址与所述第一中继终端的地址相同时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备；
方式三：当所述目标节点地址与所述第一中继终端的地址相同，且所述第一中继终端 为连接接入网设备的第一个中继终端时，所述第一中继终端确定接收所述第一数据包所使用的接口；当所述接口为Uu接口时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备；当所述接口为PC5接口时，确定所述第一设备为所述接入网设备。
在本设计提供的方法中，可以将以中继终端的地址作为路由指示信息来指导数据包的路由传输，从而可以保证在多跳通信场景中实现AN设备与远端UE之间的路由。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一路由指示信息还包含目标路径标识。
在一种可能的设计中，当所述目标设备标识指示接入所述第一中继终端的第一远端终端时，所述第一中继终端可以确定所述第一设备为所述第一远端终端。
在一种可能的设计中，当所述目标设备标识指示所述第一中继终端时，所述第一中继终端还可以确定所述第一数据包中承载的数据为所述第一中继终端的数据。
在一种可能的设计中，当所述目标设备标识为默认设备标识时，所述目标设备标识指示所述第一中继终端。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一中继终端可以通过以下步骤，确定所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址：
在保存的至少一个路由信息中，确定包含所述第一路由指示信息的目标路由信息；其中，所述目标路由信息包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址；在所述目标路由信息中确定所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址。
通过该设计，所述第一中继终端可以根据保存的路由信息，确定所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一中继终端可以通过以下方式，获取所述至少一个路由信息：
方式一：从接入网设备获取所述至少一个路由信息；
方式二：在所述第一中继终端通过第二中继终端连接接入网设备的情况下，从所述第二中继终端获取所述至少一个路由信息。
通过本设计，通信系统可以灵活地对第一中继终端的路由信息进行配置。
在一种可能的设计中，所述目标设备标识为所述目标设备的本地标识(local ID)。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一数据包的第一协议层头中还包含承载标识；所述承载标识用于指示传输所述第一数据包所使用的第一承载。
第五方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信装置，包括用于执行以上任一方面中各个步骤的单元。
第六方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信设备，包括至少一个处理元件和至少一个存储元件，其中该至少一个存储元件用于存储程序和数据，该至少一个处理元件用于读取并执行存储元件存储的程序和数据，以使得本申请以上任一方面提供的方法被实现。
第七方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信系统，包括能够实现第一方面提供的方法的第一中继终端，和能够实现第二方面提供的方法的接入网设备。可选的，所述通信系统还可以包含能够实现第三方面提供的方法的远端终端。
第八方面，本申请实施例提供了一种通信系统，包括能够实现第四方面提供的方法的第一中继终端，能够实现第二方面提供的方法的接入网设备，以及能够实现第三方面提供的方法的远端终端。
第九方面，本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运 行时，使得所述计算机执行上述任一方面提供的方法。
第十方面，本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序，当所述计算机程序被计算机执行时，使得所述计算机执行上述任一方面提供的方法。
第十一方面，本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片，所述芯片用于读取存储器中存储的计算机程序，执行上述任一方面提供的方法。
第十二方面，本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片系统，该芯片系统包括处理器，用于支持计算机装置实现上述任一方面提供的方法。在一种可能的设计中，所述芯片系统还包括存储器，所述存储器用于保存该计算机装置必要的程序和数据。该芯片系统可以由芯片构成，也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。
附图说明
图1为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的架构示意图；
图2为本申请实施例提供的一种路由方法的流程图；
图3为本申请实施例提供的一种AN设备为通信链路中相邻两个UE之间通知对方地址的流程图；
图4为本申请实施例提供的一种路由方法的流程图；
图5为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的协议栈示意图；
图6为本申请实施例提供的一种路由机制的示意图；
图7为本申请实施例提供的一种路由机制的示意图；
图8为本申请实施例提供的一种路由机制的示意图；
图9为本申请实施例提供的一种路由方法的流程图；
图10为本申请实施例提供的一种AN设备配置默认路由指示信息的流程图；
图11为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的协议栈示意图；
图12为本申请实施例提供的一种路由机制的示意图；
图13为本申请实施例提供的一种路由机制的示意图；
图14为本申请实施例提供的一种路由机制的示意图；
图15为本申请实施例提供的一种路由方法的流程图；
图16为本申请实施例提供的一种路由机制的流程图；
图17为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的协议栈示意图；
图18为本申请实施例提供的一种通信系统的协议栈示意图；
图19A为本申请实施例提供的一种BAP头处理过程示意图；
图19B为本申请实施例提供的一种BAP头处理过程示意图；
图20为本申请实施例提供的一种通信装置的结构图；
图21为本申请实施例提供的一种通信设备的结构图。
具体实施方式
本申请提供一种路由方法及装置，用于在多跳通信场景实现AN设备与远端UE之间的路由。其中，方法和设备是基于同一技术构思的，由于方法及装置解决问题的原理相似， 因此设备与方法的实施可以相互参见，重复之处不再赘述。
以下，对本申请中的部分用语进行解释说明，以便于本领域技术人员理解。
1)、接入网(access network，AN)设备，是移动通信系统中将终端设备接入到无线网络的设备。所述AN设备作为无线接入网中的节点，又可以称为基站，还可以称为无线接入网(radio access network，RAN)节点(或设备)。
目前，一些AN设备的举例为：新一代节点B(generated node B，gNB)、传输接收点(transmission reception point，TRP)、演进型节点B(evolved Node B，eNB)、无线网络控制器(radio network controller，RNC)、节点B(Node B，NB)、接入点(access point，AP)基站控制器(base station controller，BSC)、基站收发台(base transceiver station，BTS)、家庭基站(例如，home evolved NodeB，或home Node B，HNB)，或基带单元(base band unit，BBU)，企业LTE离散窄带聚合(Enterprise LTE Discrete Spectrum Aggregation，eLTE-DSA)基站等。
另外，在一种网络结构中，所述AN设备可以包括集中单元(centralized unit，CU)节点和分布单元(distributed unit，DU)节点。这种结构将网络设备的协议层拆分开，部分协议层的功能放在CU集中控制，剩下部分或全部协议层的功能分布在DU中，由CU集中控制DU。
2)、终端，是一种向用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备。终端又可以称为终端设备、用户设备(user equipment，UE)、移动台(mobile station，MS)、移动终端(mobile terminal，MT)、终端等。在本申请各实施例和附图中，仅UE为例进行说明。
例如，终端可以为具有无线连接功能的手持式设备、各种车载设备、路侧单元等。目前，一些终端设备的举例为：手机(mobile phone)、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、掌上电脑、移动互联网设备(mobile internet device，MID)、智能销售终端(point of sale，POS)、可穿戴设备，虚拟现实(virtual reality，VR)设备、增强现实(augmented reality，AR)设备、头戴式显示器(head mount display，HMD)、工业控制(industrial control)中的无线终端、无人驾驶(self driving)中的无线终端、远程手术(remote medical surgery)中的无线终端、智能电网(smart grid)中的无线终端、运输安全(transportation safety)中的无线终端、智慧城市(smart city)中的无线终端、智慧家庭(smart home)中的无线终端、各类智能仪表(智能水表、智能电表、智能燃气表)、eLTE-DSA UE、具有接入回传一体化(integrated access and backhaul，IAB)能力的设备、车载电子控制单元(electronic control unit，ECU)等、车载电脑、车载巡航系统、远程信息处理器(telematics box，T-BOX)等。
3)、第一协议层头，为区别于已有的协议层(MAC层、RLC层、PDCP层等)头的其他协议层头。示例性的，第一协议层可以为适配层，例如回传适配协议(backhaul adaptation protocol，BAP)。所述第一协议层头为适配层头，例如BAP头。以下实施例中仅以第一协议层头为BAP头为例进行说明。
4)、传输方向，在终端侧与网络侧形成的链路中包含上行传输方向和下行传输方向。其中，上行传输方向用于指示上行传输，即终端侧向网络侧传输数据或消息；下行传输方向用于指示下行传输，即网络侧向终端侧传输数据或消息。
5)、路由指示信息，用于指示数据包(数据包中承载的数据)的传输路由，即用于指导数据包的传输/转发，或者引导数据包从某个设备传输到另一个设备。针对单个中继UE或AN设备来说，数据包中包含的路由指示信息是用来确定传输对象的，从而可以将数据 包传输给该传输对象。
在上行传输方向上，在本申请提供的一些实施例中，路由指示信息可以指导数据包从远端UE传输至AN设备；在另外一些实施例中，路由指示信息可以指导数据包从链路中的末尾中继UE传输至AN设备；在另外一些实施例中，路由指示信息还可以指导数据包从链路中的末尾中继UE传输至头中继UE。
在下行传输方向，在本申请提供的一些实施例中，路由指示信息可以指导数据包从AN设备传输至远端UE；在另外一些实施例中，路由指示信息可以指导数据包从链路中的头中继UE/AN设备传输至末尾中继UE。需要说明的是，在路由指示信息可以指导传输至末尾中继UE的情况下，链路中的中继UE若通过路由指示信息确定自身未末尾中继UE的情况下，还可以结合数据包中的目标设备标识，确定传输对象，以便将数据包传输至远端UE。
6)、“和/或”，描述关联对象的关联关系，表示可以存在三种关系，例如，A和/或B，可以表示：单独存在A，同时存在A和B，单独存在B这三种情况。字符“/”一般表示前后关联对象是一种“或”的关系。
需要说明的是，本申请中所涉及的多个，是指两个或两个以上。至少一个，是指一个或多个。
另外，需要理解的是，在本申请的描述中，“第一”、“第二”等词汇，仅用于区分描述的目的，而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性，也不能理解为指示或暗示顺序。
下面结合附图对本申请实施例做进行具体说明。
图1示出了本申请实施例提供的路由方法适用的通信系统的架构。参阅图1所示，在该系统中包括：AN设备，以及多个UE(如图1中的UE1-UE11)。
所述AN设备，是网络侧能够接收和发射无线信号的实体，负责为在其管理的小区内的UE提供无线接入有关的服务，实现物理层功能、资源调度和无线资源管理、服务质量(Quality of Service，QoS)管理、无线接入控制以及移动性管理功能。
所述UE，为用户侧能够接收和发射无线信号的实体，需要接入所述AN设备最终接入网络。所述UE可以为各种为用户提供语音和/或数据连通性的设备。
为了有效地提升AN设备的小区覆盖范围，引入了U2N技术，即该系统中的UE可以通过至少一个UE接入AN设备，形成单跳通信或多跳通信。为了从功能上对UE进行区分，本申请引入了中继(relay)UE和远端(remote)UE两个概念。
中继UE作为远端UE的桥接设备，能够在一个设备(远端UE或中继UE)与另一个设备(中继UE或AN设备)之间连接建立，使二者能够通信。
远端UE为业务的发起设备，为最终接收用户数据的目的设备或生成用户数据的源设备。换句话说，远端UE为通信链路(例如RRC连接)的一个端点，另一端点为AN设备。
在多跳通信的场景中，根据中继UE在AN设备和远端UE之间的位置，可以将AN设备和远端UE之间的多个中继UE分为三类：
头中继UE，即与AN设备直接连接的中继UE。
末尾中继UE，即与远端UE直接连接的中继UE。
普通中继UE，即头中继UE和末尾中继UE之间的UE。
需要说明的是，当AN设备和远端UE之间的中继UE的数量为2时，这2个中继UE 中一个为头中继UE，另一个是末尾中继UE；只有当AN设备和远端UE之间的中继UE的数量为大于或等于3时，这些中继UE中才包含以上三类中继UE。
示例性的，在UE1-UE2-UE3-UE4-AN设备这条通信链路(简称链路1)中，UE1为远端UE，UE4为头中继UE，UE3为普通中继UE，UE2为末尾中继UE。
当然，某些UE可以一方面作为其他远端UE的中继UE，另一方面也可以作为远端UE通过至少一个中继UE连接AN设备。示例性的，虽然UE2在上述链路1中作为中继UE，但是在UE2-UE3-UE4-AN设备这条通信链路中，UE2为远端UE。
需要说明的是，在以上通信系统中，AN设备与UE之间通过移动通信技术实现连接，二者之间可以通过空中接口(即Uu接口)连接，从而实现UE和AN设备之间的通信连接(这种通信连接可以称为Uu通信连接或蜂窝网通信连接)。例如，在AN设备分别与UE4、UE7、UE8之间通过Uu接口连接。
而位置邻近的两个UE之间通过边缘链路(sidelink，SL)通信技术实现连接，二者之间可以通过近距业务通信接口5(ProSe communication 5，PC5)接口，建立直连链路进行二者之间的通信连接(这种通信连接可以称为SL通信连接)。
其中，sidelink通信技术是一种UE之间能够直连的近场通信技术，又称为近距离服务(proximity services，ProSe)通信技术，或设备到设备(device to device，D2D)通信技术。在该通信系统中，所处地理位置较近、且支持sidelink通信的两个UE可以通过直连链路进行sidelink通信。sidelink通信技术支持在小区覆盖范围内、小区覆盖范围外和小区部分覆盖场景下的广播、组播和单播传输。
其中，Uu接口和PC5接口均包含控制面协议栈和用户面协议栈。其中，用户面协议栈中均至少包含以下协议层：物理(physical，PHY)层、MAC层、无线链路控制(radio link control，RLC)层和分组数据汇聚协议(packet data convergence protocol，PDCP)层、服务数据适配协议(service data adaptation protocol，SDAP)层；控制面协议栈中至少包含以下协议层：物理层、MAC层、RLC层、PDCP层、无线资源控制(radio resource control，RRC)层。
还需要指出的是，如图1所示的通信系统作为一个示例，并不对本申请实施例提供的方法适用的通信系统构成限定。总之，本申请实施例提供的方法，适用于各种支持多跳通信技术的通信系统中，例如端到端(UE to UE，U2U)系统。本申请实施例还可以应用于各种类型和制式的通信系统，例如：第五代(The 5th Generation，5G)通信系统、长期演进(Long Term Evolution，LTE)通信系统、车到万物(vehicle to everything，V2X)、长期演进-车联网(LTE-vehicle，LTE-V)、车到车(vehicle to vehicle，V2V)、车联网、机器类通信(Machine Type Communications，MTC)、物联网(internet of things，IoT)、长期演进-机器到机器(LTE-machine to machine，LTE-M)、机器到机器(machine to machine，M2M)、企业LTE离散窄带聚合(enterprise LTE discrete spectrum aggregation，eLTE-DSA)系统等，本申请实施例不予限定。
为了在图1所示的通信系统内的多跳通信场景中实现AN设备和远端UE之间的路由，本申请提供一种路由方法。由于图1所示的通信系统中UE1-UE2-UE3-UE4-AN设备这条通信链路(简称链路1)中涉及到三类(一个头中继UE、一个普通中继UE和一个末尾中继UE)，在以下各个实施例中，主要以链路1为例进行说明。值得注意的是，本申请各实 施例并不限定仅适用于设计三类的链路，还可以使适用于其他各种链路中。
例1：本申请实施例提供的方法还可以适用于具有一个头中继UE、多个普通中继UE和一个末尾中继UE的其他链路。其中，在这些链路中，每个普通中继UE执行的步骤均可以参考本申请以下各个实施例中的UE3执行的步骤；头中继UE可以参考本申请以下各个实施例中UE4执行的步骤；而末尾中继UE可以参考本申请以下各个实施例中的UE2执行的步骤。
例2：本申请实施例提供的方法还可以适用于具有一个头中继UE和一个末尾中继UE的链路。同例1，头中继UE可以参考本申请以下各个实施例中UE4执行的步骤；而末尾中继UE可以参考以下本申请各个实施例中的UE2执行的步骤。
例3：本申请实施例提供的方法还可以适用于单跳通信的链路，即末端UE通过一个中继UE接入AN设备的链路。在这些链路中，中继UE既为头中继UE和末尾中继UE，因此该中继UE的执行的步骤，可以参考以下各个实施例中的UE2和UE4执行的步骤。
另外，还需要说明的是，以下实施例中涉及的每个步骤可以为相应的设备执行，也可以是该设备内的芯片、处理器或芯片系统等部件执行，本申请实施例并不对其构成限定。以下各实施例仅以由相应设备执行为例进行说明。
实施例一：
本实施例以中继UE的地址作为路由指示信息，来指导数据包的路由传输。下面参阅图2所示的路由方法流程图，对本实施例提供的方法进行详细说明。
S200：AN设备为通信系统中的每个中继UE配置地址(address，后续可以简写为add.)和至少一个路由信息，以及向每个中继UE发送默认路由指示信息。由于本实施例是以上述链路1为例的，所以图中仅示意的显示出AN设备为UE2、UE3、UE4配置地址和路由信息，以及默认路由指示信息。
值得注意的是，AN设备向每个中继UE发送默认路由指示信息为可选步骤。在一些实施方式中，默认路由指示信息是通信协议规定的或者预设在中继UE内部的，在该情况下，AN设备可以无需向每个中继UE发送默认路由指示信息。
在本申请实施例中，AN设备会为每个中继UE分配一个地址，用于在AN设备的覆盖范围内或在AN设备管理的一个小区内唯一识别每个中继UE。其中，中继UE的地址可以为专用标识，还可以称为中继标识、中继地址等，本申请对此不作限定。
可选的，当某个UE在成为中继UE后，可以从AN设备获取分配给该UE的地址。示例性的，在某个UE在成为中继UE后，可以向AN设备发送指示信息，该指示信息可以指示自身成为中继UE；AN设备接收到该指示信息后，可以为该UE分配地址。需要说明的是，该UE可以为通过Uu接口直接连接AN设备的UE，也可以通过其他中继UE连接AN设备的UE，本申请对此不作限定。
在本申请的实施例中，以AN设备分别为UE2、UE3、UE4分配的地址为add.UE2、add.UE3、add.UE4为例进行说明。
为了实现路由功能，AN设备还需要为每个中继UE提供至少一个路由信息。其中，任一个路由信息包含一个路由指示信息和该路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址。
其中，路由指示信息中包含目的地址。目的地址可以理解为目的中继UE的地址。
需要说明的是，AN设备为每个中继UE提供的至少一个路由信息中包含下行路由信 息和上行路由信息，下行路由信息和上行路由信息在形式上可以不作区分，也可以通过传输方向指示来区分。
值得注意的是，AN设备自身未配置地址，且未对链路中的远端UE配置地址。基于此针对下行传输而言，每条链路中的末尾中继UE是没有下一跳节点的，因此，AN设备不会为其分配下行路由信息。类似的，针对上行传输而言，每条链路中的头中继UE也是没有下一跳节点的，因此，AN设备不会为其分配相应的上行路由信息。
此外，为了保证每个中继UE能够为新接入的远端UE进行路由传输，AN设备还需要为每个中继UE提供默认路由指示信息。中继UE可以根据该默认指示信息传输新接入的远端UE的第一个数据包。
示例性的，假设AN设备为UE2提供的路由信息为表1所示，为UE3提供的路由信息为表2所示，为UE4提供的路由信息为表3所示。默认路由指示信息以包含add.xxx为例。
表1：UE2的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000001
由于在链路1中UE2为末尾中继UE，AN设备不会为其分配下行路由信息，因此，在上述表1中，该两条路由信息均为上行路由信息。
表2：UE3的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000002
在上述表2中，第1条和第2条路由信息为上行路由信息，第3条为下行路由信息。
表3：UE4的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000003
由于在链路1中UE4为头中继UE，AN设备不会为其分配上行路由信息，因此，在上述表3中，该2条路由信息均为下行路由信息。
还需要说明的是，AN设备可以通过不同的消息分别对任一个中继UE的地址、路由信息，以及默认路由指示信息进行配置；也可以通过同一消息同时对该中继UE的以上三项进行配置，本申请对此不作限定。另外，当AN设备可以在通信系统中的中继UE的拓扑关系发生变化时，即执行上述步骤对中继UE的路由信息进行更新；或者AN设备可以定时或周期性的执行上述步骤，本申请对此不作限定。
S201：UE1与UE2建立SL通信连接，UE2为UE1分配本地标识(Local ID)，以下将UE1的本地标识记为LID-UE1。
需要说明的是，由于本地标识是在中继UE的范围内用来标识通过建立SL直连链路接入该中继UE的其他UE的，因此，不同中继UE为接入的UE分配的本地标识可以相同。例如，UE2为UE1分配的本地标识取值为1，UE3为UE2分配的本地标识取值为1，UE3为UE6分配的本地标识取值为2。其中，本地标识也可以理解为一个中继UE范围内的本地索引(local index)。
S202：为了建立UE1与AN设备之间的Uu通信连接，UE1生成第一数据包，第一数据包中包含UE1向网络侧发送的第一条消息。示例性的，第一数据包中包含RRC连接建立请求。UE1向与其建立SL通信连接的UE2发送第一数据包，其中，第一数据包中不具有BAP头。UE2接收来自UE1的第一数据包。
S203：由于UE1为新接入的远端UE，AN设备还未为其分配下行专用路由指示信息，因此，UE2将默认路由指示信息(即add.xxx)作为第一数据包的目标路由指示信息；当UE2确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.xxx)与自身的地址(add.UE2)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表1中的第2条)，在目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.UE3)，并确定传输对象为下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.UE3所指示的UE3)。作为UE1的末尾中继UE，UE2确定第一数据包的目标设备本地标识为第一数据包的源设备的本地标识(即UE1的本地标识：LID-UE1)；并为第一数据包添加BAP头，生成第二数据包，其中第二数据包的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息add.xxx和目标设备本地标识LID-UE1。UE2向UE3发送第二数据包。UE3接收来自UE2的第二数据包。
为了实现路由功能，相邻两个中继UE之间还需要获取对方的地址，以便可以在执行路由传输过程中，中继UE可以根据下一跳节点地址，准确地确定该下一跳节点地址所指示的传输对象。在本申请实施例中，相邻两个中继UE之间可以但不限于通过以下两种方式，确定对方的地址：
方式一：相邻两个中继UE分别从AN设备获取自身的地址之后，通过二者之间的SL通信连接交换彼此的地址。以UE2和UE3为例，UE2在成为中继UE，并获取地址add.UE2后，向UE3发送自身的地址add.UE2；UE3接收到UE2的地址后，向UE2发送自身的地址add.UE3。
方式二：AN设备可以向每个中继UE提供其相邻的中继UE的地址。需要说明的是，AN设备在向第一中继UE提供其相邻的第二中继UE的地址时，还需要携带该第二中继UE的指示信息，以便第一中继UE能够根据第二中继UE的指示信息，确定接收的第二中继UE的地址是属于第二中继UE的。
继续以UE2和UE3为例，在图1所示的通信系统拓扑中可以看出，UE3为UE2的父中继，UE3会为UE2提供本地标识(LID-UE2)，因此AN设备在向UE3发送的第一消息中不仅包含UE2的地址，还包含UE3为UE2分配的本地标识(LID-UE2)。类似的，UE2为UE3的子中继，UE2能够识别UE3的层2标识(即L2ID-UE3)/小区无线网络临时标识(cell-radio network temporary identifier，C-RNTI)(即C-RNTI-UE3)，因此，AN设备在向UE2发送的第二消息中不仅包含UE3的地址，还包含UE3的层2标识或C-RNTI(即L2 ID-UE3/C-RNTI-UE3)。
需要说明的是，UE3的层2标识是UE2和UE3进行SL通信使用的标识，若AN设备在向UE2通知UE3的地址时还携带UE3的层2标识L2ID-UE3，则UE3需要事先向AN 设备上报自身的层2标识。
示例性的，AN设备分别向UE2和UE3通知对方的地址时，可以参考图3所示的流程，具体步骤如下：
S301：AN为在先建立Uu通信连接的UE3分配地址add.UE3。
S302：UE2在与UE3建立SL通信连接时，UE3为UE2分配本地标识LID-UE2。
S303：UE2与AN设备建立Uu通信连接，并在建立Uu通信连接过程中，UE2或UE3将UE2的本地标识LID-UE2发送给AN设备。
S304：在UE2成为中继UE后，AN设备为UE2分配地址add.UE2。
S305：AN设备向UE3发送第一消息，第一消息中携带UE2的地址add.UE2，和UE2的本地标识LID-UE2。
S306：UE3向AN设备发送自身所为中继UE的层2标识L2 ID-UE2。
需要说明的是，本申请实施例不限定UE3执行S306的时间，S306可以在S301之后S307之前的任一时刻执行。
S307：AN设备向UE2发送第二消息，第二消息中包含UE3的地址add.UE3，和UE3的层2标识或C-RNTI(即L2 ID-UE2/C-RNTI-UE3)。
需要说明的是，AN设备向UE2分配地址的步骤和向UE2提供UE3的地址可以通过该一条消息实现，即S304和S307可以同时执行，本申请对此不作限定。
综上，UE2和UE3可以确定对方的地址和指示信息。这样，在UE2在后续确定下一跳节点地址为UE3的地址add.UE3时，可以根据该add.UE3对应的L2 ID-UE2/C-RNTI-UE3识别出传输对象为UE3，并可以根据L2 ID-UE2/C-RNTI-UE3向UE3传输数据包。类似的，在UE3在后续确定下一跳节点地址为UE2的地址add.UE2时，可以根据该add.UE2对应的LID-UE2识别出传输对象为UE2，并可以根据LID-UE2向UE2传输数据包。
另外，还需要说明的是，以上仅以UE2和UE3为例进行说明，实际上，AN设备还可以通过以上方式向其他中继UE提供相邻中继UE的地址。例如，AN设备还可以分别向UE3和UE4通知对方的地址。又例如，若后续接入UE2的UE1也成为中继UE时，AN设备还可以通过以上方式分别向UE1和UE2通知对方的地址。
S204：UE3接收到第二数据包后，从第二数据包的BAP头中获取第二数据包的目标路由指示信息(即默认路由指示信息add.xxx)；当确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.xxx)与自身的地址(add.UE3)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表2中的第2条)，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.UE4)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.UE4所指示的UE4)。UE3向UE4发送第二数据包。UE4接收来自UE3的第二数据包。
S205：作为头中继UE的UE4在接收到第二数据包后，可以从第二数据包的BAP头中获取第二数据包的目标路由指示信息(即默认路由指示信息add.xxx)；当UE4确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.xxx)与自身的地址(add.UE3)不同时，UE4根据目标路由指示信息，确定传输对象为AN设备。UE4向AN设备发送第二数据包。AN设备接收来自UE4的第二数据包。
通过以上描述可知，UE4为头中继UE，因此，AN设备为其配置的路由信息中不存在上行路由信息，因此UE4需要通过除匹配路由信息以外的其他方式，确定传输对象。
由于UE4为头中继UE，因此其上行方向的下一跳为AN设备。基于此，在一种实施方式中，当UE4确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.xxx)与自身的地址(add.UE4)不同，且第二数据包的目标路由指示信息为默认路由指示信息add.xxx(即确定第二数据包的目标路由指示信息中包含默认地址)时，可以确定第二数据包为上行传输方向上的数据包，即确定传输对象为上行方向上的下一跳——AN设备。
由于UE4作为头中继UE的特殊性，其能够通过两种接口通信，而其他中继UE只能通过PC5接口通信。基于此，在另一种实施方式中，UE4可以通过接收第二数据包的接口来判断传输方向和传输对象。在本步骤中，当UE4确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.xxx)与自身的地址(add.UE4)不同，且接收第二数据包所使用的接口为PC5接口时，可以确定第二数据包为上行传输方向上的数据包，即确定传输对象为上行方向上的下一跳——AN设备。
S206：AN设备接收到第二数据包后，对第二数据包进行解封装，得到不具有BAP头的第一数据包。AN设备可以根据第一数据包中承载的数据进行后续处理，例如启动建立AN设备与UE1之间的Uu通信连接的过程。
S207：AN设备与UE1建立Uu通信连接。
S208：AN设备确定UE1的上行专用路由指示信息(后续简称为UL路由指示信息-UE1)和下行专用路由指示信息(后续简称为DL路由指示信息-UE1)，并将UL路由指示信息-UE1发送/配置给UE2，以便UE2可以利用UL路由指示信息-UE1，实现UE1的上行传输。
为了实现UE1的上行传输，AN设备通过S208将UE1的上行专用路由指示信息(UL路由指示信息-UE1)发送给UE2。进一步的，为了实现UE1的下行传输，AN设备保存UE1的下行专用路由指示信息(DL路由指示信息-UE1)。
其中，UL路由指示信息-UE1中包含上行传输方向的目的中继UE(上行传输方向上的最后一个中继UE)的地址。在本申请实施例中，UL路由指示信息-UE1中包含UE4的地址add.UE4。
DL路由指示信息-UE1中包含下行传输方向的目的中继UE(下行传输方向上的最后一个中继UE)的地址。在本申请实施例中，DL路由指示信息-UE1中包含UE2的地址add.UE2。
在一种实施方式中，UE1的上行专用路由指示信息的数量可以为一个，UE1的下行专用路由指示信息也可以为一个。
在另一种实施方式中，AN设备可以以承载为粒度，确定UE1的上行专用路由指示信息(包含多个UL路由指示信息-UE1)和/或下行专用路由指示信息(包含多个DL路由指示信息-UE1)。不同UL路由指示信息-UE1/DL路由指示信息-UE1与不同的承载存在对应关系。
在S208之后，上述链路1中的各个设备可以利用UL路由指示信息-UE1和DL路由指示信息-UE1，实现UE1的上行传输和下行传输。其中，S209-S213对应UE1的上行传输过程，S214-S217对应UE1的下行传输过程。需要说明的是，本申请并不对上行传输过程和下行传输过程的执行顺序进行限定。
下面先对UE1的上行传输过程进行说明。
S209：UE1生成第三数据包，其中，第三数据包中不具有BAP头。另外，第三数据包中可以承载UE1的用户面数据或控制面数据(例如信令)，本申请对此不作限定。UE1 向UE2发送第三数据包，UE2接收来自UE1的第三数据包。
S210：UE2接收到第三数据包后，将UE1的上行专用路由指示信息(UL路由指示信息-UE1，包含add.UE4)作为第三数据包的目标路由指示信息；当UE2确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.UE4)与自身的地址(add.UE2)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表1中的第1条)，在该目标路由信息中确定该目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.UE3)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.UE3所指示的UE3)。作为UE1的末尾中继UE，UE2确定第三数据包的目标设备本地标识为第三数据包的源设备的本地标识(即UE1的本地标识：LID-UE1)，并为第三数据包添加BAP头，生成第四数据包，其中第四数据包的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息add.UE4和目标设备本地标识LID-UE1。UE2向UE3发送第四数据包。UE3接收来自UE2的第四数据包。
在一种实施方式中，在UE2保存的UE1的上行专用路由指示信息中包含多个与不同承载存在对应关系的UL路由指示信息-UE1的情况下，UE2在确定第三数据包的目标路由指示信息时，具体包括以下步骤：
UE2确定传输第三数据包所使用的目标承载；
UE2确定目标路由指示信息为：在多个UL路由指示信息-UE1中，与目标承载存在对应关系的目标UL路由指示信息-UE1。
S211：UE3接收到第四数据包后，从第四数据包的BAP头中获取第四数据包的目标路由指示信息(即UL路由指示信息-UE1——add.UE4)；当确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.UE4)与自身的地址(add.UE3)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表2中的第1条)，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.UE4)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.UE4所指示的UE4)。UE3向UE4发送第四数据包。UE4接收来自UE3的第四数据包。
S212：作为头中继UE的UE4在接收到第四数据包后，可以从第四数据包的BAP头中获取第四数据包的目标路由指示信息(即UL路由指示信息-UE1——add.UE4)。当UE4确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.UE4)与自身的地址(add.UE4)相同，且接收第二数据包所使用的接口为PC5接口时，可以确定第二数据包为上行传输方向上的数据包，即确定传输对象为上行方向上的下一跳——AN设备。UE4向AN设备发送第四数据包。AN设备接收来自UE4的第四数据包。
通过以上S205中的具体描述可知，AN设备为UE4配置的路由信息中不存在上行路由信息，因此UE4需要通过除匹配路由信息以外的其他方式(例如通过第四数据包的接口)，确定传输对象。
S213：AN设备接收到第四数据包后，对第四数据包进行解封装，得到不具有BAP头的第三数据包。AN设备可以根据第三数据包中承载的数据(例如用户面数据或控制面数据)进行后续处理，例如向核心网设备发送用户面数据，或根据控制面数据执行相应的操作。
下面再对UE1的下行传输过程进行说明。
S214：AN设备获得第五数据包，其中，第五数据包不具有BAP头。另外，第五数据包中可以承载UE1的用户面数据或控制面数据(例如信令)，本申请对此不作限定。可选 的，第五数据包可以为AN设备自行生成的，也可以为从核心网设备接收的。AN设备将保存的UE1的下行专用路由指示信息(DL路由指示信息-UE1，包含add.UE2)作为第五数据包的目标路由指示信息，并确定第五数据包的目标设备本地标识为第五数据包的目的设备(UE1)的本地标识(即UE1的本地标识：LID-UE1)。AN设备为第五数据包添加BAP头，生成第六数据包，其中，第六数据包的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息add.UE2和目标设备本地标识LID-UE1。AN设备向UE4发送第六数据包。UE4接收来自AN设备的第六数据包。
在本申请实施例中，AN设备可以但不限于通过以下实施方式，确定传输对象为UE4：
在一种实施方式中，AN设备可以根据通信系统的拓扑关系，确定UE1所在通信链路中的头中继UE——UE4。
在另一种实施方式中，AN设备在S208中确定UE1的下行专用路由指示信息(DL路由指示信息-UE1)后，还可以确定UE1的下行专用路由指示信息对应的头中继UE(即DL路由指示信息-UE1对应UE4)。这样，AN设备可以在确定第五数据包的目标路由指示信息为DL路由指示信息-UE1时，还可以确定传输对象为DL路由指示信息-UE1对应的UE4。
在又一种实施方式中，AN设备可以维护至少一个条路由信息(均为下行路由信息)，这样，在S208中确定UE1的下行专用路由指示信息(DL路由指示信息-UE1)后，可以生成一条路由信息如下：
路由指示信息：add.UE2，下一跳节点地址：add.UE4。
可选的，在AN设备保存的UE1的下行专用路由指示信息中包含多个与不同承载存在对应关系的DL路由指示信息-UE1的情况下，AN设备在确定第五数据包的目标路由指示信息时，具体包括以下步骤：
AN设备确定传输第五数据包所使用的目标承载；
AN设备确定目标路由指示信息为：在多个DL路由指示信息-UE1中，与目标承载存在对应关系的目标DL路由指示信息-UE1。
S215：作为头中继UE的UE4在接收到第六数据包后，可以从第六数据包的BAP头中获取第六数据包的目标路由指示信息(即DL路由指示信息-UE1，包含add.UE2)。当UE4确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.UE2)与自身的地址(add.UE4)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表3中的第1条)，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.UE3)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.UE3所指示的UE3)。UE4向UE3发送第六数据包。UE3接收来自UE4的第六数据包。
S216：UE3接收到第六数据包后，从第六数据包的BAP头中获取第六数据包的目标路由指示信息(即DL路由指示信息-UE1——add.UE2)；当确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.UE2)与自身的地址(add.UE3)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表2中的第3条)，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.UE2)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.UE2所指示的UE2)。UE3向UE2发送第六数据包，UE2接收来自UE3的第六数据包。
S217：作为末尾中继UE的UE2在接收到第六数据包后，可以从第六数据包的BAP 头中获取第六数据包的目标路由指示信息(即DL路由指示信息-UE1——add.UE2)；在UE确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.UE2)与自身的地址(add.UE2)相同时，从第六数据包的BAP头中获取第六数据包的目标设备本地标识(LID-UE1)，并确定传输对象为目标设备本地标识所指示的远端UE(即LID UE1所指示的UE1)。UE2对第六数据包进行解封装，得到不具有BAP头的第五数据包。UE2向UE1发送第五数据包，UE1接收来自UE2的第五数据包。
之后，UE1可以根据第五数据包中承载的数据，进行后续处理。
本申请实施例提供了一种路由方法，该方法可以将中继UE的地址作为路由指示信息来指导数据包的路由传输，以在多跳通信场景中实现AN设备和远端UE之间的路由。
需要说明的是，基于本实施例提供的路由方法，也可以实现单跳通信场景中的路由传输。下面以UE5-UE4-AN设备这条通信链路(简称链路2)为例，参考图4所示的流程图进行说明。
S401：UE5与UE4建立SL通信连接，UE4为UE5分配本地标识(LID-UE5)。
S402：为了建立UE5与AN设备之间的Uu通信连接，UE5生成第七数据包，第七数据包中包含UE5向网络侧发送的第一条消息。UE5向UE4发送第七数据包，其中，第七数据包不具有BAP头。UE4接收来自UE5的第七数据包。
S403：由于UE5为新接入的远端UE，AN设备还未为其分配下行专用路由指示信息，因此，UE4将默认路由指示信息(add.xxx)作为七数据包的目标路由指示信息；当UE4确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.xxx)与自身的地址(add.UE4)不同时，根据目标路由指示信息，确定传输对象为AN设备。作为UE5的末尾中继UE，UE4确定第七数据包的目标设备本地标识为第七数据包的源设备的本地标识(即UE5的本地标识：LID-UE5)，并为第七数据包添加BAP头，生成第八数据包，其中，第八数据包的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备本地标识。UE4向AN设备发送第八数据包。AN设备接收来自UE4的第八数据包。
与S205类似的，UE4可以在确定目标路由指示信息为默认路由指示信息时，确定第七数据包为上行传输方向上的数据包，即确定传输对象为上行方向上的下一跳——AN设备；或者UE4确定接收第七数据包所使用的接口为PC5接口时，可以确定第七数据包为上行传输方向上的数据包，即确定传输对象为上行方向上的下一跳——AN设备。
S404：与S206类似的，AN设备接收到第八数据包后，对第八数据包进行解封装，得到不具有BAP头的第七数据包。AN设备可以根据第七数据包中承载的数据进行后期处理，例如，启动建立AN设备与UE5之间的Uu通信连接的过程。
S405：AN设备与UE5建立Uu通信连接。
S406：AN设备确定UE5的上行专用路由指示信息(后续简称为UL路由指示信息-UE5)和下行专用路由指示信息(后续简称为DL路由指示信息-UE5)，并将UL路由指示信息-UE5发送/配置给UE4，以便UE5可以利用UL路由指示信息-UE5，实现UE5的上行传输。
其中，UL路由指示信息-UE5中包含UE4的地址add.UE4；DL路由指示信息-UE5中包含UE4的地址add.UE4。
还需要说明的是，在一种实施方式中，UE5的上行专用路由指示信息的数量可以为一个，UE5的下行专用路由指示信息也可以为一个。
在另一种实施方式中，AN设备可以以承载为粒度，确定UE5的上行专用路由指示信 息(包含多个UL路由指示信息-UE5)和/或下行专用路由指示信息(包含多个DL路由指示信息-UE5)。不同UL路由指示信息-UE5/DL路由指示信息-UE5与不同的承载存在对应关系。
在S406之后，上述链路2中的各个设备可以利用UL路由指示信息-UE5，和DL路由指示信息-UE5，实现UE5的上行传输和下行传输。其中，S407-S409对应上行传输过程，S410-S411对应下行传输过程。
下面先对UE5的上行传输过程进行说明。
S407：UE5生成第九数据包，其中，第九数据包中不具有BAP头。另外，第九数据包中可以承载UE5的用户面数据或控制面数据，本申请对此不做限定。UE5向UE4发送第九数据包，UE4接收来自UE5的第九数据包。
S408：作为末尾中继UE和头中继UE的UE4接收到第九数据包后，将UE5的上行专用路由指示信息(UL路由指示信息-UE5，包含add.UE4)作为第九数据包的目标路由指示信息。UE4确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.UE4)与自身的地址(add.UE4)相同，且接收第九数据包所使用的接口为PC5接口时，可以确定第九数据包为上行传输方向上的数据包，即确定传输对象为上行方向上的下一跳——AN设备。作为UE5的末尾中继UE，UE4确定第九数据包的目标设备本地标识为第九数据包的源设备的本地标识(即UE5的本地标识：LID-UE5)，并为第九数据包添加BAP头，生成第十数据包，其中，第十数据包的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备本地标识。UE4向AN设备发送第十数据包。AN设备接收来自UE4的第十数据包。
与S210类似的，在UE4保存的UE5的上行专用路由指示信息中包含多个与不同承载存在对应关系的UL路由指示信息-UE5的情况下，UE4在确定第九数据包的目标路由指示信息时，具体包括以下步骤：
UE4确定传输第九数据包所使用的目标承载；
UE2确定目标路由指示信息为：在多个UL路由指示信息-UE5中，与目标承载存在对应关系的目标UL路由指示信息-UE5。
S409：AN设备接收到第十数据包后，对第十数据包进行解封装，得到不具有BAP头的第九数据包。AN设备可以根据第九数据包中承载的数据(例如用户面数据或控制面数据)进行后续处理，例如向核心网设备发送用户面数据，或根据控制面数据执行相应的操作。
下面再对UE5的下行传输过程进行说明。
S410：AN设备获得第十一数据包，其中，第十一数据包不具有BAP头。另外，第十一数据包可以承载UE5的用户面数据或控制面数据。AN设备将保存的UE5的下行专用路由指示信息(DL路由指示信息-UE5，包含add.UE4)作为第十一数据包的目标路由指示信息，并确定第十一数据包的目标设备本地标识为第十一数据包的目的设备(UE5)的本地标识(即UE5的本地标识LID-UE5)。AN设备为第十一数据包添加BAP头，生成第十二数据包，其中，第十二数据包的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息add.UE4和目标设备本地标识LID-UE5。AN设备向UE4发送第十二数据包。UE4接收来自AN设备的第十二数据包。
与S214类似的，AN设备可以根据通信系统的拓扑关系，或者根据DL路由指示信息-UE5与UE4的对应关系，确定传输对象为UE4。
S411：作为头中继UE的UE4在接收到第十二数据包后，可以从第十二数据包的BAP头中获取第十二数据包的目标路由指示信息(即DL路由指示信息-UE5，包含add.UE4)。当UE4确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.UE4)与自身的地址(add.UE4)相同，且接收第十二数据包所使用的接口为Uu接口时，可以确定第十二数据包为下行传输方向上的数据包，即确定传输对象为下行方向上的下一跳——UE4的远端UE。UE4可以从第十二数据包的BAP头中获取第十二数据包的目标设备本地标识(LID-UE5)，并确定传输对象为目标设备本地标识所指示的远端UE(即LID UE5所指示的UE5)。UE4对第十二数据包进行解封装，得到不具有BAP头的第十一数据包。UE4向UE5发送第十一数据包，UE5接收来自UE4的第十一数据包。
之后，UE5可以根据第十一数据包中承载的数据，进行后续处理。
结合本实施例一中图2和图4所示的路由过程，本实施例提供了一种路由机制1，该机制1包含：
下行方向：
AN设备向某个远端UE发送数据包1时，需要为该数据包添加BAP头，生成数据包2，其中，该数据包2的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备本地标识。其中，目标路由指示信息为该远端UE的下行专用路由指示信息(包含目的地址，即目的中继UE的地址)，目标设备本地标识为该远端UE的本地标识。
任一个中继UE在收到该数据包2之后，先判断目标路由指示信息中包含的目的地址与自身的地址是否相同；
若判定二者相同，则根据数据包2的BAP头中包含的目标设备本地标识，在该中继UE的范围内确定该目标设备本地标识所指示的远端UE，待对数据包2解封装之后，向该远端UE发送解封装得到的数据包1；
若判定二者不同，则在本地保存的至少一个路由信息中，查找包含目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息，并在目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址，确定下一跳节点地址所指示的中继UE；向确定的该中继UE发送数据包2。
上行方向：
与上述下行方向的工作机制类似。
不同的是，中继UE在接收到远端UE发送的不具有BAP头的数据包1之后，确定数据包1的目标路由指示信息和目标设备本地标识。其中，目标路由指示信息为该远端UE的上行专用路由指示信息(包含目的地址，即目的中继UE的地址)或默认路由指示信息，目标设备本地标识为该远端UE的本地标识。该中继UE为该数据包1添加BAP头，生成数据包2。然后按照上述工作机制确定传输对象，发送数据包2。
由于以上描述可知，由于头中继UE与AN设备之间通过Uu接口连接，与其他中继UE通过PC5接口连接。因此，在AN设备未为头中继UE配置上行路由信息时，头中继UE可以结合接口来确定后续动作。头中继UE接收到数据包2之后，确定该数据包2的BAP头中的目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址与自身地址相同，则判断接收数据包2所使用的接口；若该接口为Uu接口，则进一步通过该数据包2的目标设备本地标识来确定传输对象；若接口为PC5接口，则确定AN设备为传输对象。
结合以上实施例一中的描述可知，在上述实施例一所示的多跳通信场景中(继续以链路1为例)，最终形成的整套协议栈可以如图5所示。
从图5所示的协议栈来看，远端UE向中继UE发送的数据包中可以不携带BAP头，例如图中UE1向UE 2发送数据包是不携带BAP头的，而UE2向UE3发送的数据包是需要携带BAP头的。
考虑到中继UE本身也可能会作为远端UE与AN设备进行通信。例如UE2-UE3-UE4-AN设备这条通信链路(简称链路3)。在链路3中，UE2为远端UE，UE3为末尾中继UE，UE4为头中继UE。
在一种实施方式中，在该链路3中，作为远端UE的UE2也可以通过以上流程进行上行传输和下行传输。作为远端UE的UE2向UE3发送的数据包中不需要携带BAP头。
因此，从UE3的角度看，在上行方向上，在一些情况下会从UE2接收不带BAP头的数据包(在UE2作为远端UE时，例如上述链路3的场景)，在另一些情况下会从UE2接收携带BAP头的数据包(在UE2为中继UE时，例如上述链路1的场景)。
类似的，在下行方向上，在一些情况下UE3向UE2发送的数据包是不带BAP头的(在UE2作为远端UE时，例如上述链路3的场景)，在另一些情况下UE3向UE2发送的数据包是携带BAP头的(在UE2为中继UE时，例如上述链路1的场景)。
在这种链路1和链路3并存的复杂场景下，若不对不同情况下的数据包做任何区分，那UE3就无法判断应该采用何种方式解析接收到的数据包，是按照携带有BAP头的数据包格式去解析，还是按照不携带BAP头的格式去解析。
基于此，本申请实施例可以但不限于通过以下实施方式解决以上问题：
在第一种实施方式中，考虑通过不同的逻辑信道来区分。即一个UE作为远端UE与中继UE通信时使用的逻辑信道，与该UE作为中继UE与相邻中继UE通信时使用的逻辑信道是不一样的。
在第二种实施方式中，作为其他链路中的中继UE的UE，在另一个链路中作为远端UE向相邻中继UE发送数据包时，在该数据包中携带BAP头。且该BAP头中也会携带目标路由指示信息和目标设备本地标识。其中，目标设备本地标识为默认本地标识，用于指示自身。例如，默认本地标识为LID-000。
这样，在该UE接收到一个数据包后，若该数据包中的目标路由指示信息中包含的目的地址与自身的地址相同，且该数据包中的目标设备本地标识为该默认本地标识，则确定该数据包为自身的。该UE会将该数据包进行解析，得到不包含BAP头的数据包递交到自身的上层(例如PDCP层)。
还需要说明的是，在第二种实施方式中，AN设备还需要向每个通信系统中的每个中继UE配置其上行专用路由指示信息(包含该中继UE所在的链路中头中继UE的地址)，并将该上行专用路由指示信息发送给对应的中继UE，以便该中继UE可以根据该上行专用路由指示信息，进行该中继UE的上行传输。
在本申请实施例中，头中继UE也可以通过上述方法实现自身数据包的上行和下行传输。此时，AN设备为其分配的上行专用路由指示信息和下行专用路由指示信息中包含的地址均为该头中继UE的地址。该头中继UE确定自身的本地标识为上述默认本地标识(例如LID-000)。头中继UE在接收到一个数据包后，确定该数据包中的目标路由指示信息中包含的目的地址与自身的地址相同，接收数据包的接口为Uu接口，且该数据包中的目标 设备本地标识为该默认本地标识，则确定该数据包为自身的。
基于实施例一提供的路由方法，在图1所示的通信系统中，AN设备为每个UE分配的地址、AN设备以每个UE作为目的设备发送数据包时该数据包中的BAP头内的内容等，可以参考图6所示。
实施例二：
基于以上实施例一提供的路由方法，本申请实施例还提供了另一种路由方法。该方法以中继UE的地址或AN设备的地址作为路由指示信息，来指导数据包的路由传输。需要说明的是，本申请实施例提供的方法同样可以应用于图2所示的路由方法流程图，因此，下面继续以链路1为例，并参考图2，对本申请实施例提供的方法进行详细说明。
S200：AN设备为通信系统中的每个中继UE配置地址、至少一个路由信息，以及向每个中继UE发送默认路由指示信息。
本步骤与实施例一中的相应步骤类似，不同的是：
1、在本申请实施例中，AN设备自身也配置有地址(后续简称为add.AN)。AN设备可以将自身的地址发送给各个链路中的头中继UE，以便头中继UE后续可以确定该AN设备的地址所指示的该AN设备，从而确定传输对象，进而实现向AN设备进行数据包传输。
其中，add.AN可以为默认AN地址，也可以为AN设备为自身分配的，或者为用户配置的，本申请对此不做限定。
2、AN设备为每个中继UE分配的默认路由指示信息。由于，根据默认路由指示信息，至少一个中继UE能够将数据包传输至AN设备，且AN设备具有地址，因此，默认路由指示信息中包含的地址add.xxx可以为AN设备的地址add.AN，或者为指示AN设备的另一个默认地址，本申请对此不作限定。
值得注意的是，AN设备向每个中继UE发送默认路由指示信息为可选步骤。在一些实施方式中，默认路由指示信息是通信协议规定的或者预设在中继UE内部的，在该情况下，AN设备可以无需向每个中继UE发送默认路由指示信息。
3、AN设备为每个中继UE配置的至少一个路由信息与实施例一中不同。
由于AN设备具有地址，因此，针对上行传输而言，每条链路中的头中继UE的下一跳节点是AN设备。因此，AN设备能够为每个中继UE配置上行路由信息，且该上行路由信息与实施例一中的不同。(需要注意的是，本实施例中AN设备为每个中继UE配置的下行路由信息与实施例一中相同)。
为了与实施例一中UE2、UE3和UE4的路由信息进行对比，示例性的，在本申请实施例中，AN设备为UE2、UE3和UE4提供的路由信息可以参考一下表4-表6所示。需要说明的是，以下表4-表6中，以默认路由指示信息中包含的默认地址add.xxx与AN设备的地址add.AN不同为例。
表4：UE2的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000004
由于在链路1中UE2为末尾中继UE，AN设备不会为其分配下行路由信息，因此，在上述表4中，该两条路由信息均为上行路由信息。
表5：UE3的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000005
在上述表5中，第1条和第2条路由信息为上行路由信息，第3条为下行路由信息。
表6：UE4的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000006
在上述表6中，第1条和第2条路由信息为上行路由信息，第3条和第4条为下行路由信息。
S201：UE1与UE2建立SL通信连接，UE2为UE1分配本地标识(以下简称为LID-UE1)。
S202：为了建立UE1与AN设备之间的Uu通信连接，UE1生成第一数据包，第一数据包中包含UE1向网络侧发送的第一条消息，其中，第一数据包中不具有BAP头。UE1向UE2发送第一数据包。UE2接收来自UE1的第一数据包。
S203：由于UE1为新接入的远端UE，AN设备还未为其分配下行专用路由指示信息，因此，UE2将默认路由指示信息(即add.xxx)作为第一数据包的目标路由指示信息；当UE2确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.xxx)与自身的地址(add.UE2)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表4中的第2条)，在目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.UE3)，并确定传输对象为下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.UE3所指示的UE3)。作为UE1的末尾中继UE，UE2确定第一数据包的目标设备本地标识为第一数据包的源设备的本地标识(即UE1的本地标识：LID-UE1)；并为第一数据包添加BAP头，生成第二数据包，其中第二数据包的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息add.xxx和目标设备本地标识LID-UE1。UE2向UE3发送第二数据包。UE3接收来自UE2的第二数据包。
与实施例一类似的，为实现路由功能，相邻两个中继UE之间还需要获取对方的地址，以便可以在执行路由传输过程中，中继UE可以根据下一跳节点地址，准确地确定该下一跳节点地址所指示的传输对象。具体过程可以参考实施一中的描述此处不再赘述。
S204：UE3接收到第二数据包后，从第二数据包的BAP头中获取第二数据包的目标路由指示信息(即默认路由指示信息add.xxx)；当确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.xxx)与自身的地址(add.UE3)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表5中的第2条)，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.UE4)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址 所指示的下一跳节点(即add.UE4所指示的UE4)。UE3向UE4发送第二数据包。UE4接收来自UE3的第二数据包。
S205：UE4在接收到第二数据包后，可以从第二数据包的BAP头中获取第二数据包的目标路由指示信息(即默认路由指示信息add.xxx)；当UE4确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.xxx)与自身的地址(add.UE4)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表6中的第2条)，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.AN)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.AN所指示的AN设备)。UE4向AN设备发送第二数据包。AN设备接收来自UE4的第二数据包。
S206-S208与实施例一中的对应步骤相同，具体过程可以相互参见，此处不再赘述。即AN设备在与UE1建立Uu通信连接之后，确定UE1的上行专用路由指示信息(后续简称为UL路由指示信息-UE1)和下行专用路由指示信息(后续简称为DL路由指示信息-UE1)，并将UL路由指示信息-UE1配置给UE2，以便UE2可以利用UL路由指示信息-UE1，实现UE1的上行传输。
与实施例一不同的是，UL路由指示信息-UE1中包含上行传输方向的目的设备的地址，由于在该情况下目的设备为AN设备，因此，UL路由指示信息-UE1中包含add.AN。
与实施例一相同的，DL路由指示信息-UE1中包含下行传输方向的目的中继UE(下行传输方向上的最后一个中继UE)的地址。在本申请实施例中，DL路由指示信息-UE1中包含UE2的地址add.UE2。
在S208之后，上述链路1中的各个设备可以利用UL路由指示信息-UE1，和DL路由指示信息-UE1，实现UE1的上行传输和下行传输。其中，S209-S213对应UE1的上行传输过程，S214-S217对应UE1的下行传输过程。
需要说明的是，由于AN设备确定的UE1的DL路由指示信息-UE1与实施例一相同，因此，链路1中的各个设备可以采用与实施例一相同的过程，根据DL路由指示信息-UE1实现下行传输过程。基于此，本申请实施例对S214-S217的下行传输过程不再赘述，具体过程可以参考以上实施例一中的描述。
由于AN设备确定的UE1的UL路由指示信息-UE1与实施例一中的不同，因此下面详细对链路1中的各个设备根据UL路由指示信息-UE1实现上行传输过程S209-S213进行描述。
S209：UE1生成第三数据包，其中，第三数据包中不具有BAP头。UE1向UE2发送第三数据包，UE2接收来自UE1的第三数据包。
S210：UE2接收到第三数据包后，将UE1的上行专用路由指示信息(UL路由指示信息-UE1，包含add.AN)作为第三数据包的目标路由指示信息；当UE2确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.AN)与自身的地址(add.UE2)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表4中的第1条)，在该目标路由信息中确定该目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.UE3)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.UE3所指示的UE3)。作为UE1的末尾中继UE，UE2确定第三数据包的目标设备本地标识为第三数据包的源设备的本地标识(即UE1的本地标识：LID-UE1)，并为第三数据包添加BAP头，生成第四数据包，其中第四数据包的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息add.UE4和目标设备本地标识LID-UE1。 UE2向UE3发送第四数据包。UE3接收来自UE2的第四数据包。
在一种实施方式中，在UE2保存的UE1的上行专用路由指示信息中包含多个与不同承载存在对应关系的UL路由指示信息-UE1的情况下，UE2在确定第三数据包的目标路由指示信息时，具体包括以下步骤：
UE2确定传输第三数据包所使用的目标承载；
UE2确定目标路由指示信息为：在多个UL路由指示信息-UE1中，与目标承载存在对应关系的目标UL路由指示信息-UE1。
S211：UE3接收到第四数据包后，从第四数据包的BAP头中获取第四数据包的目标路由指示信息(即UL路由指示信息-UE1——add.AN)；当确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.AN)与自身的地址(add.UE3)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表5中的第1条)，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.UE4)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.UE4所指示的UE4)。UE3向UE4发送第四数据包。UE4接收来自UE3的第四数据包。
S212：UE4在接收到第四数据包后，可以从第四数据包的BAP头中获取第四数据包的目标路由指示信息(即UL路由指示信息-UE1——add.AN)。当UE4确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.AN)与自身的地址(add.UE4)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表6中的第1条)，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.AN)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.AN所指示的AN设备)。UE4向AN设备发送第四数据包。AN设备接收来自UE4的第四数据包。
S213：AN设备接收到第四数据包后，对第四数据包进行解封装，得到不具有BAP头的第三数据包。AN设备可以根据第三数据包中承载的数据(例如用户面数据或控制面数据)进行后续处理，例如向核心网设备发送用户面数据，或根据控制面数据执行相应的操作。
本申请实施例提供了一种路由方法，该方法可以将中继UE的地址或AN设备的地址作为路由指示信息来指导数据包的路由传输，以在多跳通信场景中实现AN设备和远端UE之间的路由。
同样的，基于本实施例提供的路由方法，也可以实现单跳通信场景中的路由传输，例如UE5-UE4-AN设备这条通信链路(简称链路2)，该链路2中的各个设备可以采用与上述相同的方法实现UE5的上行传输和下行传输，具体过程可以参考以上实施例中的描述，此次不再赘述。
结合本实施例二中的路由过程，本申请实施例提供了一种路由机制2，该机制2包括：
下行方向与机制1相同。
上行方向：
不同的是，中继UE在接收到远端UE发送的不具有BAP头的数据包1之后，确定数据包1的目标路由指示信息和目标设备本地标识。其中，目标路由指示信息为该远端UE的上行专用路由指示信息(包含目的地址，即AN设备的地址)或默认路由指示信息，目标设备本地标识为该远端UE的本地标识。该中继UE为该数据包1添加BAP头，生成数据包2。然后按照上述工作机制确定传输对象，发送数据包2，直至将数据包2传输至AN 设备。
结合以上实施例二中的描述可知，在上述实施例一所示的多跳通信场景中(继续以链路1为例)，最终形成的整套协议栈可以如图5所示。
同样的，中继UE本身在作为远端UE与AN设备进行通信时，例如实施例一中提及的链路3中的UE2作为远端UE时，也可以采用以上实施例一中的两种实施方式实现，具体过程可以参阅实施例一中相应过程的描述，此处不再赘述。
在实施例二提供的路由方法中，在图1所示的通信系统中，AN设备为每个UE分配的地址、AN设备以每个UE作为目的设备发送数据包时该数据包中的BAP头内的内容等，可以参考图7所示。
实施例三：
基于以上实施例一和实施例二，本申请实施例还提供了又一种路由方法。在该方法中将设备的地址和路径标识(path ID)共同作为路由指示信息来指导数据包的路由传输。
在该方法中，AN设备可以为每条通信链路分配path ID。例如，AN设备可以根据通信系统的拓扑关系，为每条通信链路分配path ID。
需要说明的是，AN设备为每条链路分配的path ID可以区分传输方向，即针对同一条通信链路，AN设备为该链路的上行传输方向分配一个path ID，为该链路的下行传输方向分配一个path ID；或者AN设备在分配path ID时不区分传输方向，即针对一个通信链路分配一个path ID。
以下以AN设备不区分传输方向为每条通信链路分配一个path ID为例进行举例。
例如，结合实施例一提供的路由方法，AN设备还为以下通信链路分配path ID-1：UE4-AN设备，UE3-UE4-AN设备，UE5-UE4-AN设备；为通信链路UE7-AN设备分配path ID-2；为以下通信链路分配path ID-3：UE8-AN设备，UE9-UE8-AN设备，UE11-UE8-AN设备；AN设备为以下通信链路分配path ID-4：UE2-UE3-UE4-AN设备，UE6-UE3-UE4-AN设备；AN设备为通信链路UE1-UE2-UE3-UE4-AN设备分配path ID-5；AN设备为通信链路UE10-UE9-UE8-AN设备分配path ID-6。另外，AN设备为默认路由指示信息分配的path ID-yyy。
基于该示例，AN设备为链路1中的中继UE分配的路由信息为表7-表9所示。
表7：UE2的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000007
在上述表7中，该两条路由信息均为上行路由信息。
表8：UE3的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000008
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000009
在上述表8中，第1条至第3条路由信息为上行路由信息，第4条为下行路由信息。
表9：UE4的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000010
上述表9中，该2条路由信息均为下行路由信息。
需要说明的是，每个远端UE与AN设备建立Uu通信连接后，AN设备为该远端UE分配上行专用路由指示信息和下行专用路由指示信息。其中，这些路由指示信息中不仅包含相应的地址还需要包含AN设备为远端UE所在的通信链路分配的path ID。
在本申请实施例提供的路由机制3可以参考实施例一提供的机制1或实施例二提供的机制2，具体可以参考以上对机制1或机制2的详细描述，此处不再赘述。值得注意的是，该机制3中，中继UE查找到的目标路由信息包含的路由指示信息中的路径标识、设备的地址分别与目标路由指示信息的目标路径标识、目的地址均相同。
基于实施例三提供的路由方法，在图1所示的通信系统中，AN设备以每个UE作为目的设备发送数据包时该数据包中的BAP头内的内容，可以参考图8所示。
实施例四：
本实施例提供的方法以UE的地址作为路由指示信息来指导数据包的路由传输。下面参阅图9所示的路由方法流程图，对本实施例提供的方法进行详细说明。需要说明的是，在本实施例中，AN设备不具有上述用于路由的地址。另外，通过对以上实施例一至实施例三的描述可知，在以上实施例中数据包的BAP头中不仅包含目标路由指示信息还包含目标设备本地标识，本实施例与以上实施例不同的是，数据包的BAP头包含目标路由指示信息，无需包含目标设备本地标识。
S900：AN设备为通信系统中的每个UE配置地址和至少一个路由信息。
在本申请实施例中，AN设备会为每个UE分配一个地址，用于在AN设备的覆盖范围内或在AN设备管理的一个小区内唯一识别每个中继UE。
需要说明的是，当AN设备针对一个UE配置地址之后，还为UE所在链路中的中继UE配置新的路由信息，这些更新的路由信息中的路由指示信息包含该UE的地址，这样，这些中继UE可以根据这些更新的路由信息，进行该UE的下行传输。
需要说明的是，AN设备为每个中继UE提供的至少一个路由信息中包含下行路由信息和上行路由信息，下行路由信息和上行路由信息在形式上可以不作区分，也可以通过传输方向指示来区分。任一个路由信息包含一个路由指示信息和该路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址。其中，路由指示信息中包含目的地址，在上行路由信息的路由指示信息中包含的目的地址，可以理解为目的中继UE的地址。在下行路由信息的路由指示信息中包含的目的地址可以目的设备(链路中的远端UE)的地址。
与实施例一不同的是，AN设备自身未配置地址，但能够对链路中的远端UE配置地址，因此，针对下行传输而言，每条链路中的末尾中继UE是存在下一跳节点的，所以AN设备会为其分配下行路由信息。不同的是，针对上行传输而言，每条链路中的头中继UE也是没有下一跳节点的，所以AN设备不会为其分配相应的上行路由信息。
另外，为了能够实现新接入的远端UE的上行传输，本申请实施例中还引入的一个默认路由指示信息。该默认路由指示信息用于将新接入系统的远端UE的第一个数据包传输至AN设备。本申请实施例后续以默认路由指示信息包含add.xxx为例进行说明。
相应的，AN设备为已接入系统的UE配置的路由信息中存在一条包含该默认路由指示信息的路由信息。
继续以链路1为例，AN设备为UE2、UE3配置的包含该默认路由指示信息的上行路由信息分别如表10和表11所示：
表10：UE2的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000011
表11：UE3的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000012
S901：UE1与UE2建立SL通信连接。
S902：为了建立UE1与AN设备之间的Uu通信连接，UE1生成第一数据包，第一数据包中包含UE1向网络侧发送的第一条消息，示例性的，第一数据包中包含RRC连接建立请求。UE1将默认路由指示信息(包含add.xxx)作为第一数据包的目标路由指示信息，并对第一数据包添加BAP头，生成第二数据包，其中第二数据包的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息(add.xxx)。UE1向UE2发送第二数据包。UE2接收来自UE1的第二数据包。
在本步骤中，UE1可以通过以下两种实施方式确定默认路由指示信息：
第一种实施方式：默认路由指示信息可以为预定义，并存储在UE中的。
第二种实施方式：默认路由指示信息可以为UE1从UE2获得的。
在第二种实施例中，UE1可以通过参阅图10所示的流程，获取默认路由指示信息，包括以下步骤：
S1001a：在UE2与AN设备建立Uu通信连接后，UE2从AN设备获取默认路由指示信息。
S1001b：在UE2与其他UE(例如UE3)建立SL通信连接后，从其他UE获取默认路由指示信息。
其中S1001a和S1001b为并列方案，UE2可以使用其中任一种方案获取默认路由指示信息。
S1002：UE1与UE2建立SL通信连接。
S1003：UE2向UE1发送默认路由指示信息。
另外，UE1可以通过以下两种实施方式，确定传输对象为UE2。
第一种实施方式：
UE1确定与其存在SL通信连接的UE2。
第二种实施方式：
UE2在执行上述S1003的情况下，UE2还可以向UE1发送UE2的指示信息，以使UE1可以根据指示信息确定默认路由指示信息与UE2对应，从而在确定第一数据包的目标路由指示信息为默认路由指示信息时，确定第一数据包的传输对象为UE2。
可选的，UE2还可以向UE1发送包含默认路由指示信息和对应的下一跳节点地址(add.UE2)对应关系的路由信息，以使UE1可以确定第一数据包的目标路由指示信息为默认路由指示信息时，确定包含默认路由指示信息的该路由信息，并在该路由信息中确定默认路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(add.UE2)，最终确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址对一个的下一跳节点(即add.UE2所指示的UE2)。
在本申请中，为了实现路由功能，相邻两个UE之间还需要获取对方的地址，以便可以在执行路由传输过程中，可以根据下一跳节点地址，准确地确定该下一跳节点地址所指示的对象。相邻两个中继UE之间确定对方的地址的过程可以参考实施一中的具体描述，此处不再赘述。
S903：UE2接收到第二数据包后，从第二数据包的BAP头中获取第二数据包的目标路由指示信息(即默认路由指示信息add.xxx)；当确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.xxx)与自身的地址(add.UE2)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表10中的路由指示信息)，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.UE3)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.UE3所指示的UE3)。UE2向UE3发送第二数据包。UE3接收来自UE2的第二数据包。
S904：UE3接收到第二数据包后，从第二数据包的BAP头中获取第二数据包的目标路由指示信息(即默认路由指示信息add.xxx)；当确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.xxx)与自身的地址(add.UE3)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表11中的路由指示信息)，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.UE4)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.UE4所指示的UE4)。UE3向UE4发送第二数据包。UE4接收来自UE3的第二数据包。
S905：与实施例一中的S205相同，UE4在接收到第二数据包后，可以从第二数据包的BAP头中获取第二数据包的目标路由指示信息(即默认路由指示信息add.xxx)，并根据目标路由指示信息，采用S205中记载的实施方式确定传输对象为AN设备。UE4向AN设备发送第二数据包。AN设备接收来自UE4的第二数据包。
S906-S907与实施例一中的S206-S207相同，此处不再赘述。
S908a：AN设备为UE1分配地址(即add.UE1)，并确定UE1的上行专用路由指示信息(后续简称为UL路由指示信息-UE1)和下行专用路由指示信息(后续简称为UL路由指示信息-UE1)，并将UL路由指示信息-UE1和add.UE1发送/配置给UE1，以便UE1可以利用UL路由指示信息-UE1，实现UE1的上行传输。
可选的，AN设备可以在将UL路由指示信息-UE1和add.UE1配置给UE1时，AN设备可以将上述信息发送给UE2，UE2在通过SL RRC消息发送给UE1。为了实现UE1的下行传输，AN设备保存UE1的下行专用路由指示信息(UL路由指示信息-UE1)。
其中，UL路由指示信息-UE1中包含上行传输方向的目的中继UE(上行传输方向上的最后一个中继UE)的地址。在本申请实施例中，UL路由指示信息-UE1中包含UE4的地址add.UE4。
DL路由指示信息-UE1中包含下行传输方向的目的设备地址(即add.UE1)。
在一种实施方式中，UL路由指示信息-UE1的数量可以为一个，DL路由指示信息-UE1的数量也可以为一个。
在另一种实施方式中，AN设备可以以承载为粒度，确定UE1的上行专用路由指示信息(包含多个UL路由指示信息-UE1)和/或下行专用路由指示信息(包含多个DL路由指示信息-UE1)。不同UL路由指示信息-UE1/DL路由指示信息-UE1与不同的承载存在对应关系。
S908b：AN设备根据UE1的UL路由指示信息-UE1和DL路由指示信息-UE1为链路中的每个中继UE配置新的路由信息，以便每个中继UE可以根据路由信息实现UE1的上行传输和下行传输。
其中，AN设备为UE2、UE3、UE4分配的新的路由信息分别如表12-表14所示：
表12：UE2的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000013
表13：UE3的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000014
表14：UE4的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000015
在S908b之后，上述链路1中的各个设备可以利用UL路由指示信息-UE1，和DL路由指示信息-UE1，实现UE1的上行传输和下行传输。其中，S909-S913对应UE1的上行传输过程，S914-S918对应UE1的下行传输过程。
下面先对UE1的上行传输过程进行说明。
S909：UE1生成第三数据包，其中第三数据包不具有BAP头。可选的，第三数据包中可以承载UE1的用户面数据或控制面数据，本申请对此不作限定。UE1将UL路由指示信息-UE1作为第三数据包的目标路由指示信息，并对第三数据包添加BAP头，生成第四数据包，其中第四数据包的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息(UL路由指示信息-UE1，包含add.UE4)。UE1向UE2发送第四数据包。UE2接收来自UE1的第四数据包。
同上述S902，UE1也可以通过以下两种实施方式，确定传输对象为UE2。
第一种实施方式：
UE1确定与其存在SL通信连接的UE2。
第二种实施方式：
UE2在执行上述S908a的情况下，UE2还可以向UE1发送UE2的指示信息，以使UE1可以根据指示信息确定UL路由指示信息-UE1与UE2对应，从而在确定第三数据包的目标路由指示信息为UL路由指示信息-UE1时，确定第三数据包的传输对象为UE2。
可选的，AN设备还可以向UE1发送包含UL路由指示信息-UE1和对应的下一跳节点地址(add.UE2)对应关系的路由信息，以使UE1可以确定第三数据包的目标路由指示信息为UL路由指示信息-UE1时，确定包含UL路由指示信息-UE1的该路由信息，并在该路由信息中确定UL路由指示信息-UE1对应的下一跳节点地址(add.UE2)，最终确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址对一个的下一跳节点(即add.UE2所指示的UE2)。
在本申请中，为了实现路由功能，相邻两个UE之间还需要获取对方的地址，以便可以在执行路由传输过程中，可以根据下一跳节点地址，准确地确定该下一跳节点地址所指示的对象。相邻两个中继UE之间确定对方的地址的过程可以参考实施一中的具体描述，此处不再赘述。
S910：UE2接收到第四数据包后，从第四数据包的BAP头中获取第四数据包的目标路由指示信息(即UL路由指示信息-UE1，包含add.UE4)；当确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.UE4)与自身的地址(add.UE2)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表12中的第1条路由指示信息)，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.UE3)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.UE3所指示的UE3)。UE2向UE3发送第四数据包。UE3接收来自UE2的第四数据包。
S911：UE3接收到第四数据包后，从第四数据包的BAP头中获取第四数据包的目标路由指示信息(即UL路由指示信息-UE1，包含add.UE4)；当确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.UE4)与自身的地址(add.UE3)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表13中的第1条路由指示信息)，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.UE4)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.UE4所指示的UE4)。UE3向UE4发送第四数据包。UE4接收来自UE3的第四数据包。
S912：与实施例一中的S205相同，UE4在接收到第四数据包后，可以从第四数据包的BAP头中获取第四数据包的目标路由指示信息(即UL路由指示信息-UE1，包含add.UE4)，并根据目标路由指示信息，采用S212中记载的实施方式确定传输对象为AN设备。UE4向AN设备发送第四数据包。AN设备接收来自UE4的第四数据包。
S913：同S213，此处不再赘述。
下面再对UE1的下行传输过程进行说明。
S914：AN设备获得第五数据包，其中，第五数据包不具有BAP头。另外，第五数据包中可以承载UE1的用户面数据或控制面数据(例如信令)，本申请对此不作限定。可选的，第五数据包可以为AN设备自行生成的，也可以为从核心网设备接收的。AN设备将保存的UE1的下行专用路由指示信息(DL路由指示信息-UE1，包含add.UE1)作为第五数据包的目标路由指示信息。AN设备为第五数据包添加BAP头，生成第六数据包，其中，第六数据包的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息add.UE1。AN设备向UE4发送第六数据包。UE4接收来自AN设备的第六数据包。
在一种实施方式中，AN设备可以根据通信系统的拓扑关系，确定UE1所在通信链路中的头中继UE——UE4。
在另一种实施方式中，AN设备在S908中确定UE1的下行专用路由指示信息(DL路由指示信息-UE1)后，还可以确定UE1的下行专用路由指示信息对应的头中继UE(即DL路由指示信息-UE1对应UE4)。这样，AN设备可以在确定第五数据包的目标路由指示信息为DL路由指示信息-UE1时，还可以确定传输对象为DL路由指示信息-UE1对应的UE4。
在又一种实施方式中，AN设备可以维护至少一个条路由信息(均为下行路由信息)，这样，在S908中确定UE1的下行专用路由指示信息(DL路由指示信息-UE1)后，可以生成一条路由信息如下：
路由指示信息：add.UE1，下一跳节点地址：add.UE4。
可选的，在AN设备保存的UE1的下行专用路由指示信息中包含多个与不同承载存在对应关系的DL路由指示信息-UE1的情况下，AN设备在确定第五数据包的目标路由指示信息时，具体包括以下步骤：
AN设备确定传输第五数据包所使用的目标承载；
AN设备确定目标路由指示信息为：在多个DL路由指示信息-UE1中，与目标承载存在对应关系的目标DL路由指示信息-UE1。
S915：UE4在接收到第六数据包后，可以从第六数据包的BAP头中获取第六数据包的目标路由指示信息(即DL路由指示信息-UE1，包含add.UE1)。当UE4确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.UE1)与自身的地址(add.UE4)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表14中的第1条)，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.UE3)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.UE3所指示的UE3)。UE4向UE3发送第六数据包。UE3接收来自UE4的第六数据包。
S916：UE3接收到第六数据包后，从第六数据包的BAP头中获取第六数据包的目标路由指示信息(即DL路由指示信息-UE1——add.UE1)；当确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.UE1)与自身的地址(add.UE3)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表13中的第2条)，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.UE2)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.UE2所指示的UE2)。UE3向UE2发送第六数据包，UE2接收来自UE3的第六数据包。
S917：UE2在接收到第六数据包后，可以从第六数据包的BAP头中获取第六数据包的目标路由指示信息(即DL路由指示信息-UE1——add.UE1)；在UE确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.UE1)与自身的地址(add.UE2)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表12中的第2条)，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.UE1)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.UE1所指示的UE1)。UE2向UE1发送第六数据包，UE1接收来自UE2的第六数据包。
S918：UE1接收到第六数据包后，可以从第六数据包的BAP头中获取第六数据包的目标路由指示信息(即DL路由指示信息-UE1——add.UE1)；在UE确定目标路由指示信 息包含的目的地址(add.UE1)与自身的地址(add.UE1)相同时，对第六数据包进行解封装，得到不具有BAP头的第五数据包。最终，UE1可以根据第五数据包中承载的数据，进行后续处理。
本申请实施例提供了一种路由方法，该方法可以将UE的地址作为路由指示信息来指导数据包的路由传输，以在多跳通信场景中实现AN设备和远端UE之间的路由。
需要说明的是，基于本申请实施例提供的路由方法，也可以实现单跳通信场景中的路由传输，具体过程可以参考以上多跳通信场景中的流程，此处不再赘述。
结合本实施例四中的路由过程，本实施例提供了一种路由机制4，该机制包含：
UE在生成数据包1后，为该数据包1添加BAP头，生成数据包2。其中，该数据包2的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息，目标路由指示信息为该UE的上行专用路由指示信息(指示目标中继UE的地址)。然后该UE将数据包2传输给该UE连接的中继UE。
任一个UE在收到该数据包3之后，先判断位于数据包3的BAP头中目标路由指示信息中包含的目的地址与自身的地址是否相同；
若判定二者相同，则确定该数据包3为自身的数据包，对数据包3解封装得到不具有BAP头的数据包4，然后基于该数据包4中承载的数据进行后续处理；
若判定二者不同，则在本地保存的至少一个路由信息中，查找包含目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息，并在目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址，确定下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳；并向确定的下一跳发送数据包3。
还需要说明的是，由于在本实施例中，头中继UE不具有上行路由信息，头中继UE执行的策略与机制1中的策略类似，即头中继UE可以结合接口来确定后续动作。具体的，头中继UE接收到数据包2之后，确定该数据包2的BAP头中的目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址与自身地址相同时，则判断接收数据包2所使用的接口；若该接口为Uu接口，则进一步确定该数据包2为自身的数据包；若接口为PC5接口，则确定AN设备为传输对象。
结合以上实施例四种的描述可知，在上述实施例四所示的多跳通信场景中(继续以链路1为例)，最终形成的整套协议栈可以如图11所示，其中，在该链路1中的各个设备传输的数据包均为携带有BAP头的。
基于实施例四提供的路由方法，在图1所示的通信系统中，AN设备以每个UE作为目的设备发送数据包时该数据包中的BAP头内的内容，可以参考图12所示。
实施例五：
本实施例提供的方法UE的地址或AN设备的地址作为路由指示信息来指导数据包的路由传输。本申请实施例提供的方法同样可以应用于图9所示的路由方法流程图，下面继续以链路1为例，并参考图9，对本申请实施例提供的方法进行详细说明。与实施例四相同的，在本申请实施例中数据包的BAP头包含目标路由指示信息，无需包含目标设备本地标识。
S900：AN设备为通信系统中的每个UE配置地址和至少一个路由信息。
本步骤与实施例四类似，不同的是：
1、在本申请实施例中AN设备自身也配置有地址(即add.AN)。AN设备可以将自身的地址发送给各个链路中的头中继UE，以便头中继UE后续可以确定该AN设备的地址所指示的该AN设备，从而确定传输对象，进而实现向AN设备进行数据包传输。
其中，add.AN可以为默认AN地址，也可以为AN设备为自身分配的，或者为用户配置的，本申请对此不做限定。
2、本申请实施例中涉及的默认路由指示信息add.xxx可以为AN设备的地址add.AN，或者为指示AN设备的另一个默认地址，本申请对此不作限定。以下实施例以add.xxx与add.AN不同进行说明。
3、由于AN设备具有地址，因此，AN设备为每个UE配置的路由信息也与实施例四种的路由信息不同。
由于AN设备具有地址，因此，针对上行传输而言，每条链路中的头中继UE的下一跳节点是AN设备。因此，AN设备能够为每个UE配置上行路由信息，且该上行路由信息与实施例四中的不同。(需要注意的是，本实施例中AN设备为每个中继UE配置的下行路由信息与实施例四中相同)。
为了与实施四中UE2、UE3的路由信息进行对比，本实施例继续以链路1为例，AN设备为UE2、UE3和UE4配置的包含该默认路由指示信息的上行路由信息分别如表15-17所示：
表15：UE2的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000016
表16：UE3的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000017
表17：UE4的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000018
S901-S904与实施例四中的S901-S904相同，此处不再赘述。
S905：UE4在接收到第二数据包后，可以从第二数据包的BAP头中获取第二数据包的目标路由指示信息(即默认路由指示信息add.xxx)；当UE4确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.xxx)与自身的地址(add.UE4)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表17中的路由信息)，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.AN)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.AN所指示的AN设备)。UE4向AN设备发送第二数据包。AN设备接收来自UE4的第二数据包。
S906-S907与实施例四中的S906-S907相同，此处不再赘述。
S908a：AN设备为UE1分配地址(即add.UE1)，并确定UE1的上行专用路由指示信 息(后续简称为UL路由指示信息-UE1)和下行专用路由指示信息(后续简称为DL路由指示信息-UE1)，并将UL路由指示信息-UE1和add.UE1发送/配置给UE1，以便UE1可以利用UL路由指示信息-UE1，实现UE1的上行传输。
可选的，AN设备可以在将UL路由指示信息-UE1和add.UE1配置给UE1时，AN设备可以将上述信息发送给UE2，UE2在通过SL RRC消息发送给UE1。
其中，UL路由指示信息-UE1中包含上行传输方向的目的设备的地址。在本申请实施例中，该目的设备为AN设备，因此，UL路由指示信息-UE1中包含AN设备的地址add.AN。
DL路由指示信息-UE1中包含下行传输方向的目的设备地址(即add.UE1)。
在一种实施方式中，UL路由指示信息-UE1的数量可以为一个，DL路由指示信息-UE1的数量也可以为一个。
在另一种实施方式中，AN设备可以以承载为粒度，确定UE1的上行专用路由指示信息(包含多个UL路由指示信息-UE1)和/或下行专用路由指示信息(包含多个DL路由指示信息-UE1)。不同UL路由指示信息-UE1/DL路由指示信息-UE1与不同的承载存在对应关系。
S908b：AN设备根据UE1的UL路由指示信息-UE1和DL路由指示信息-UE2为链路中的每个中继UE配置新的路由信息，以便每个中继UE可以根据路由信息实现UE1的上行传输和下行传输。
其中，AN设备为UE2、UE3、UE4分配的新的路由信息分别如表18-表20所示：
表18：UE2的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000019
表19：UE3的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000020
表20：UE4的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000021
在S908b之后，上述链路1中的各个设备可以利用UL路由指示信息-UE1，和DL路由指示信息-UE1，实现UE1的上行传输和下行传输。其中，S909-S913对应UE1的上行传输过程，S914-S918对应UE1的下行传输过程。
需要说明的是，由于AN设备为UE1配置的DL路由指示信息-UE1与实施例四相同，因此，链路1中的各个设备可以采用与实施例四相同的过程，根据DL路由指示信息-UE1实现下行传输过程。基于此，本申请实施例对S214-S217的下行传输过程不再赘述，具体过程可以参考以上实施例一中的描述。
由于AN设备为UE1配置的UL路由指示信息-UE1与实施例四中的不同，因此下面详细对链路1中的各个设备根据UL路由指示信息-UE1实现上行传输过程S909-S913进行描述。
S909：UE1生成第三数据包，其中第三数据包不具有BAP头。可选的，第三数据包中可以承载UE1的用户面数据或控制面数据，本申请对此不作限定。UE1将UL路由指示信息-UE1作为第三数据包的目标路由指示信息，并对第三数据包添加BAP头，生成第四数据包，其中第四数据包的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息(UL路由指示信息-UE1，包含add.AN)。UE1向UE2发送第四数据包。UE2接收来自UE1的第四数据包。
在本实施例中，UE1也可以通过两种实施方式，确定传输对象为UE2，具体过程可以参考实施例四中的S909中的相应描述，此次不再赘述。
S910：UE2接收到第四数据包后，从第四数据包的BAP头中获取第四数据包的目标路由指示信息(即UL路由指示信息-UE1，包含add.AN)；当确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.AN)与自身的地址(add.UE2)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表18中的第1条路由指示信息)，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.UE3)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.UE3所指示的UE3)。UE2向UE3发送第四数据包。UE3接收来自UE2的第四数据包。
S911：UE3接收到第四数据包后，从第四数据包的BAP头中获取第四数据包的目标路由指示信息(即UL路由指示信息-UE1，包含add.AN)；当确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.AN)与自身的地址(add.UE3)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表19中的第1条路由指示信息)，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.UE4)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.UE4所指示的UE4)。UE3向UE4发送第四数据包。UE4接收来自UE3的第四数据包。
S912：UE4接收到第四数据包后，从第四数据包的BAP头中获取第四数据包的目标路由指示信息(即UL路由指示信息-UE1，包含add.AN)；当确定目标路由指示信息包含的目的地址(add.AN)与自身的地址(add.UE4)不同时，在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表20中的第1条路由指示信息)，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址(即add.AN)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点(即add.AN所指示的AN设备)。UE4向AN设备发送第四数据包。AN设备接收来自UE4的第四数据包。
S913：同S213，此处不再赘述。
本申请实施例提供了一种路由方法，该方法可以将UE的地址或AN设备的地址作为路由指示信息来指导数据包的路由传输，以在多跳通信场景中实现AN设备和远端UE之间的路由。
同样的，基于本实施例提供的路由方法，也可以实现单跳通信场景中的路由传输，具体过程可以参考以上实施例中的描述，此处不再赘述。
结合本实施例五中的路由过程，本申请实施例提供了一种路由机制5，该机制5包括：
UE在生成数据包1后，为该数据包1添加BAP头，生成数据包2。其中，该数据包2的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息，目标路由指示信息为该UE的上行专用路由指示信 息(指示目标中继UE的地址)。然后该UE将数据包2传输给该UE连接的中继UE。
任一个UE在收到该数据包3之后，先判断位于数据包3的BAP头中目标路由指示信息中包含的目的地址与自身的地址是否相同；
若判定二者相同，则确定该数据包3为自身的数据包，对数据包3解封装得到不具有BAP头的数据包4，然后基于该数据包4中承载的数据进行后续处理；
若判定二者不同，则在本地保存的至少一个路由信息中，查找包含目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息，并在目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址，确定下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳；并向确定的下一跳发送数据包3。
结合以上实施例五中的描述可知，在上述实施例五所示的多跳通信场景中(继续以链路1为例)，最终形成的整套协议栈可以如图11所示。
基于实施例五提供的路由方法，在图1所示的通信系统中，AN设备以每个UE作为目的设备发送数据包时该数据包中的BAP头内的内容，可以参考图13所示。
实施例六：
基于以上实施例四和实施例五，本申请实施例还提供了一又一种路由方法。在该方法中，将设备的地址和路径标识(path ID)共同作为路由指示信息来指导数据包的路由传输。
同实施例三中对path ID的描述，在本申请实施例中，AN设备为每条链路分配的path ID也可以区分传输方向，或者不区分传输方向。
以下以AN设备不区分传输方向为每条通信链路分配一个path ID为例进行举例。
例如，结合实施例四提供的路由方法，AN设备分别为以下通信链路分配对应的path ID：
UE4-AN设备——path ID-1；
UE7-AN设备——path ID-2；
UE8-AN设备——path ID-3；
UE3-UE4-AN设备——path ID-4；
UE5-UE4-AN设备——path ID-5；
UE9-UE8-AN设备——path ID-6；
UE11-UE8-AN设备——path ID-7；
UE2-UE3-UE4-AN设备——path ID-8；
UE6-UE3-UE4-AN设备——path ID-9；
UE10-UE9-UE8-AN设备——path ID-10；
UE1-UE2-UE3-UE4-AN设备——path ID-11。
另外，AN设备为默认路由指示信息分配的path ID-yyy。
基于该示例，AN设备在实施一种的S908b为链路1中的UE分配的路由信息为表21-表23所示。
表21：UE2的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000022
表22：UE3的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000023
表23：UE4的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000024
需要说明的是，每个远端UE与AN设备建立Uu通信连接后，AN设备为该远端UE分配上行专用路由指示信息和下行专用路由指示信息。其中，这些路由指示信息中不仅包含相应的地址还需要包含AN设备为远端UE所在的通信链路分配的path ID。
在本申请实施例提供的路由机制6可以参考实施例四提供的机制4或实施例五提供的机制5，具体可以参考以上对机制4或机制5的详细描述，此处不再赘述。值得注意的是，该机制5中，UE查找到的目标路由信息包含的路由指示信息中的路径标识、设备的地址分别与目标路由指示信息的目标路径标识、目的地址均相同。
基于实施例六提供的路由方法，在图1所示的通信系统中，AN设备以每个UE作为目的设备发送数据包时该数据包中的BAP头内的内容，可以参考图14所示。
实施例七：
本实施例以路径标识作为路由指示信息，来指导数据包的路由传输。下面参阅图15所示的路由方法流程图，对本实施例提供的方法进行详细说明。
S1501：UE1与UE2建立SL通信连接，并通过UE2以及其他中继UE与AN设备建立Uu通信连接。UE1可以在于UE2建立SL通信连接过程中或之后为自身分配设备标识(后续可以简写为EID-UE1)；或者UE2可以在与UE1建立SL通信连接过程中或之后，为UE1分配设备标识EID-UE1；或者AN设备可以在与UE1建立Uu通信连接过程中或之后，为UE1分配设备标识EID-UE1。
本申请实施例涉及的设备标识可以在中继UE的范围内用来标识接入该中继UE的其他UE。可选的，设备标识可以为本地标识(Local ID，简称为LID)，或者为层2标识(L2 ID)，本申请对此不作限定。
S1502：UE2或UE1将UE1的设备标识EID-UE1通知给AN设备。AN设备确定UE1的上行专用路由指示信息(UL路由指示信息-UE1)和下行专用路由指示信息(DL路由指示信息-UE1)；并根据UL路由指示信息-UE1和DL路由指示信息-UE1为链路1中的每个中继UE配置新的路由信息，以便每个中继UE可以根据路由信息实现UE1的上行传输和下行传输。
其中，UL路由指示信息-UE1和DL路由指示信息-UE1中均包含AN设备为UE1分配的路径标识(path ID-UE1)。为了区分UL路由指示信息-UE1和DL路由指示信息-UE1，保证中继UE可以查找正确的路由信息实现数据包的传输，本申请实施例可以通过以下两种实施方式实现：
在第一种实施方式中，UE1的路径标识(path ID-UE1)包含两个：UE1上行传输方向的路径标识(简称为UL path ID-UE1)，UE1下行传输方向的路径标识(简称为DL path ID-UE1)。
在第二种实施方式中，UE1的路由标识(path ID-UE1)为一个，但是不同方向上的专用路由指示信息还包含相应传输方向指示。即UL路由指示信息-UE1中还包含UL指示，DL路由指示信息-UE1中还包含DL指示。
为了实现UE1的路由传输，AN设备还需要为每个中继UE提供至少一个路由信息。其中，任一个路由信息包含一个路由指示信息和该路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点设备标识。
需要说明的是，AN设备为每个中继UE提供的至少一个路由信息中包含下行路由信息和上行路由信息，下行路由信息和上行路由信息在形式上可以不作区分，但是下行路由信息中包含DL路由指示信息-UE1，而上行路由信息中包含UL路由指示信息-UE1。
以下仅以第一种实施方式为例进行说明。
示例性的，AN设备为UE2、UE3、UE4分配的新的路由信息分别如表24-表26所示。
表24：UE2的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000025
其中，表24中的第2条路由信息为可选项。在一种实施方式中，AN设备为UE2分配表24中的两条路由信息；在另一种实施方式中，AN设备仅针对UE2分配表24中的第一条路由信息。其中，default EID-UE可以为UE的默认设备标识，当UE2在确定某个数据包的目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点设备标识为default EID-UE时，表示不存在下一跳节点，需要将数据包转发给UE2的远端UE，或该数据包为自身的数据包。AN设备的设备标识可以为第二默认设备标识，例如EID-111。
表25：UE3的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000026
表26：UE4的路由信息
Figure PCTCN2020122531-appb-000027
目前，两个UE建立SL通信连接时，每个UE会为该SL通信连接分配一个L2 ID。例如，UE1和UE2建立SL通信连接后，UE1为该通信连接分配L2 ID-UE1，UE2为该通信连接分配L2 ID-UE2，并且UE1和UE2会将各自的L2 ID通知对侧。这样，当UE1向UE2发送数据包时，将L2 ID-UE1作为源设备标识添加到数据包中，将L2 ID-UE2作为目 的设备标识添加到数据包中；同样的，UE2向UE2发送数据包时，将L2 ID-UE2作为源设备标识添加到数据包中，将L2 ID-UE1作为目的设备标识添加到数据包中。
在中继UE为接入其的其他UE分配设备标识(例如：本地标识)的场景中，在下行传输方向上，这些其他UE即为该中继UE的下一跳节点。因此，该中继UE可以识别出下一跳节点设备标识(下一跳节点的本地标识)所指示的下一跳节点，进而实现数据包的下行传输。但是在上行传输方向上，一般中继UE是无法直接识别出下一跳节点设备标识所指示的下一跳节点的，为此，本申请可以通过SL通信连接标识(即L2 ID)，采用以下实施方式解决该问题：
第一种实施方式：
AN设备向每个中继UE发送以下两项信息：其上行传输方向的下一跳节点的设备标识，该下一跳节点的L2 ID(即该下一跳节点针对该中继UE与该下一跳节点之间的SL通信连接分配的)。
例如，在链路1中，AN设备向UE2发送UE3的设备标识和L2 ID(EID-UE3(即LID-UE3)，L2 ID-UE3)；AN设备向UE3发送UE4的设备标识和L2 ID(EID-UE4(LID-UE4)，L2 ID-UE4)。而EID-UE3可以为UE4为UE3分配的，EID-UE4可以为AN设备或UE4分配的。
另外，AN设备向各个通信链路中的头中继UE发送AN设备的设备标识(即EID-AN)，以便这些头中继UE可以确定该AN设备的设备标识指示AN设备。其中，AN设备的设备标识可以为第一默认设备标识，例如EID-000。
第二种实施方式：
任一个UE通过与其建立SL通信连接的另一个UE接入AN设备之后，该UE可以为与其建立SL通信连接的另一个UE分配设备标识(例如本地标识)，并向AN设备上报该另一个UE的设备标识以及该另一个UE的L2 ID(该另一个UE针对该UE和该另一个UE之间的SL通信连接分配的)。这样AN设备可以根据接收的这些设备标识，生成以上路由信息。
例如，UE3在与UE4建立SL通信连接之后，UE4为UE3分配设备标识(EID-UE3，即LID-UE3)，UE3也为UE4分配专用设备标识(EID-UE4-UL，区别于UE4的本地标识LID-UE4)，并将UE4的专用设备标识以及UE4针对该SL通信连接分配的L2 ID-UE4发送给AN设备。此时，AN设备根据EID-UE4-UL为UE3分配上行路由信息，即在表25的第1条路由信息中包含的EID-UE4实际为本例中的EID-UE4-UL；而AN设备根据EID-UE3为UE4分配下行路由信息，即在表26中的第2条路由信息中包含的EID-UE3即为本例中UE4为UE3分配的EID-UE3(LID-UE3)。
再例如，UE2在与UE3建立SL通信连接之后，UE3为UE2分配设备标识(EID-UE2，即LID-UE2)，UE2也为UE3分配专用设备标识(EID-UE3-UL，区别于UE3的本地标识LID-UE3)，并将UE4的专用设备标识以及UE4针对该SL通信连接分配的L2 ID-UE4发送给AN设备。此时，AN设备根据EID-UE3-UL为UE2分配上行路由信息，即在表24的第1条路由信息中包含的EID-UE3实际为本例中的EID-UE3-UL；而AN设备根据EID-UE2为UE3分配下行路由信息，即在表25中的第2条路由信息中包含的EID-UE3即为本例中UE3为UE3分配的EID-UE3(LID-UE3)。
另外，通信系统中的各个通信链路中的头中继UE也为连接的AN设备分配设备标识 (即EID-AN)，以便这些头中继UE可以确定该AN设备的设备标识指示AN设备。任一头中继UE可以将其为AN设备分配的设备标识发送给AN设备，以使AN设备根据该AN设备的设备标识为该头中继UE分配上行路由信息。例如，表26中的路由信息包含的EID-AN即为UE4为AN设备分配的。又或者，通信系统中可以默认AN设备的设备标识为第一默认设备标识，例如EID-000；这样，各个通信链路中的头中继UE可以无需再为AN设备分配设备标识。以下仅以AN设备的设备标识为第一默认设备标识为例进行说明。
在S1502之后，上述链路1中的各个设备可以利用UL路由指示信息-UE1，和DL路由指示信息-UE1，实现UE1的上行传输和下行传输。其中，S1503-S1507对应UE1的上行传输过程，S1508-S1511对应UE1的下行传输过程。
下面先对UE1的上行传输过程进行说明。
S1503：UE1生成第一数据包，其中，第一数据包中不具有BAP头。另外，第一数据包可以承载UE1的用户面数据或控制面数据，本申请对此不做暗限定。UE1向UE2发送第一数据包，UE2接收来自UE1的第一数据包。
S1504：UE2接收到第一数据包后，将UE1的上行专用路由指示信息(UL路由指示信息-UE1，UL path ID-UE1)作为第一数据包的目标路由指示信息；当UE2在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表24中的第1条)时，在该目标路由信息中确定该目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点设备标识(即EID-UE3)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点设备标识所指示的下一跳节点(即EID-UE3所指示的UE3)。作为UE1的末尾中继UE，UE2确定第一数据包的目标设备标识为第一数据包的源设备的设备标识(即UE1的设备标识：EID-UE1)，并为第一数据包添加BAP头，生成第二数据包，其中第二数据包的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息UL path ID-UE1和目标设备标识EID-UE1。UE2向UE3发送第二数据包。UE3接收来自UE2的第二数据包。
S1505：UE3接收到第二数据包后，从第二数据包的BAP头中获取第二数据包的目标路由指示信息(即UL路由指示信息-UE1，UL path ID-UE1)；当在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表25中的第1条)时，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点设备标识(即EID-UE4)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点设备标识所指示的下一跳节点(即EID-UE4所指示的UE4)。UE3向UE4发送第二数据包。UE4接收来自UE3的第二数据包。
S1506：UE4接收到第二数据包后，从第二数据包的BAP头中获取第二数据包的目标路由指示信息(即UL路由指示信息-UE1，UL path ID-UE1)；当在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表26中的第1条)时，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点设备标识(即EID-AN)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点设备标识所指示的下一跳节点(即EID-AN所指示的AN设备)。UE4向AN设备发送第二数据包。AN设备接收来自UE4的第二数据包。
S1507：AN设备接收到第二数据包后，对第二数据包进行解封装，得到不具有BAP头的第一数据包。AN设备可以根据第一数据包中承载的数据(例如用户面数据或控制面数据)进行后续处理，例如向核心网设备发送用户面数据，或根据控制面数据执行相应的操作。
下面再对UE1的下行传输过程进行说明。
S1508：AN设备获得第三数据包，其中，第三数据包不具有BAP头。另外，第三数据包中可以承载UE1的用户面数据或控制面数据(例如信令)，本申请对此不作限定。可选的，第三数据包可以为AN设备自行生成的，也可以为从核心网设备接收的。AN设备将保存的UE1的下行专用路由指示信息(DL路由指示信息-UE1，DL path ID-UE1)作为第三数据包的目标路由指示信息，并确定第三数据包的目标设备标识为第三数据包的目的设备(UE1)的设备标识(即EID-UE1，例如UE2为UE1分配的本地标识LID-UE1)。AN设备为第三数据包添加BAP头，生成第四数据包，其中，第四数据包的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息DL path ID-UE1和目标设备标识EID-UE1。AN设备向UE4发送第四数据包。UE4接收来自AN设备的第四数据包。
在本申请实施例中，AN设备可以但不限于通过以下实施方式，确定传输对象为UE4：
在一种实施方式中，AN设备可以根据通信系统的拓扑关系，确定UE1所在通信链路中的头中继UE——UE4。
在另一种实施方式中，AN设备在S1502中为UE1分配下行专用路由指示信息(DL路由指示信息-UE1)后，还可以确定UE1的下行专用路由指示信息对应的头中继UE(即DL路由指示信息-UE1对应UE4)。这样，AN设备可以在确定第三数据包的目标路由指示信息为DL路由指示信息-UE1时，还可以确定传输对象为DL路由指示信息-UE1对应的UE4。
在又一种实施方式中，AN设备可以维护至少一个条路由信息(均为下行路由信息)，这样，在S1502中为UE1分配下行专用路由指示信息(DL路由指示信息-UE1)后，可以生成一条路由信息如下：
路由指示信息：DL路由指示信息-UE1，下一跳节点设备标识：EID.UE4。
这样，AN设备可以在确定第三数据包的目标路由指示信息为DL路由指示信息-UE1时，还可以确定传输对象为DL路由指示信息-UE1对应的下一跳节点设备标识，并根据下一跳节点设备标识所指示的下一跳节点(EID.UE4所指示的UE4)。其中，UE4的设备标识(EID-UE4)可以为AN设备为其分配的。
S1509：UE4接收到第四数据包后，从第四数据包的BAP头中获取第四数据包的目标路由指示信息(即DL路由指示信息-UE1，DL path ID-UE1)；当在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表26中的第2条)时，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点设备标识(即EID-UE3)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点设备标识所指示的下一跳节点(即EID-UE3所指示的UE3)。UE4向UE3发送第四数据包。UE3接收来自UE4的第四数据包。
S1510：UE3接收到第四数据包后，从第四数据包的BAP头中获取第四数据包的目标路由指示信息(即DL路由指示信息-UE1，DL path ID-UE1)；当在保存的至少一个路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表25中的第2条)时，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点设备标识(即EID-UE2)，并确定传输对象为该下一跳节点设备标识所指示的下一跳节点(即EID-UE2所指示的UE2)。UE3向UE2发送第四数据包。UE2接收来自UE3的第四数据包。
S1511：UE2接收到第四数据包后，从第四数据包的BAP头中获取第四数据包的目标路由指示信息(即DL路由指示信息-UE1，DL path ID-UE1)；在UE2保存有包含目标路由指示信息的路由信息(如表24中的第2条路由信息)的情况下，当在保存的至少一个 路由信息确定包含该目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息(例如表24中的第2条)时，在该目标路由信息中确定目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点设备标识(即default EID-UE)，并确定该下一跳节点设备标识所指示的下一跳节点为UE2，UE2从第四数据包的BAP头中获取第四数据包的目标设备标识(EID-UE1)；或者在UE2确定未保存有包含目标路由指示信息的路由信息的情况下，从第四数据包的BAP头中获取第四数据包的目标设备标识(EID-UE1)。UE2确定传输对象为目标设备标识所指示的远端UE(即EID-UE1所指示的UE1)。UE2对第四数据包进行解封装，得到不具有BAP头的第三数据包。UE2向UE1发送第三数据包。UE1接收来自UE2的第三数据包。
之后，UE1可以根据第一数据包中承载的数据，进行后续处理。
本申请实施例提供了一种路由方法，该方法可以将UE的设备标识作为路由指示信息来指导数据包的路由传输，以在多跳通信场景中实现AN设备和远端UE之间的路由。
基于本实施例提供的路由方法，也可以实现单跳通信场景中的路由传输，具体过程可以参考以上实施例中的描述，此处不再赘述。
结合本实施例七中的路由过程，本申请实施例提供了一种路由机制7，该机制7包括：
下行方向：
AN设备向某个远端UE发送数据包1时，需要为该数据包添加BAP头，生成数据包2，其中，该数据包2的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识。其中，目标路由指示信息为该远端UE的下行专用路由指示信息(包含AN设备为该远端UE分配的路径标识)，目标设备标识为该远端UE的标识。
任一个中继UE在收到该数据包2之后，在本地保存的至少一个路由信息中，查找包含目标路由指示信息的目标路由信息，当目标路由信息中包含的目标路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点设备标识为第二默认设备标识时，向数据包2中的目标设备标识所指示的远端设备传输数据包2；或者确定本地保存的至少一个路由信息中不存在目标路由信息时，向数据包2中的目标设备标识所指示的远端设备传输数据包2。当在本地保存的至少一个路由信息中查找到目标路由信息，且目标路由信息对应的下一跳节点设备标识不为第二默认设备标识，则确定下一跳节点设备标识所指示的下一跳节点，并向下一跳节点发送数据包2。
上行方向：
与上述下行方向的工作机制类似。
不同的是，中继UE在接收到远端UE发送的不具有BAP头的数据包1之后，确定数据包1的目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识。其中，目标路由指示信息为该远端UE的上行专用路由指示信息(包含AN设备为该远端UE分配的路径标识)，目标设备标识为该远端UE的本地标识。该中继UE为该数据包1添加BAP头，生成数据包2，BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识。然后按照上述工作机制确定传输对象，发送数据包2。
结合以上实施例七中的描述可知，在上述实施例七中所示的多跳通信场景中(继续以链路1为例)，最终形成的整套协议栈可以如图5所示。
基于以上实施例七提供的路由方法，在图1所示的通信系统中，AN设备以每个UE 作为目的设备发送数据包时数据包中的BAP头内的内容，可以参考图16所示。
实施例八：
由于在一些实施例中，协议栈中引入适配层以携带承载标识(bearer ID，BID)等信息，用于支持承载映射。其中，承载连接的作用是实现IP连通性，在UE和网络侧之间传送业务数据流，实现更精细化的服务质量(Quality of Service，QoS)控制。示例性的，所述承载标识可以按照功能区分：默认承载标识(Befault Bearer)、专用承载标识(Dedicated Bearer)；还可以按照序号进行区分：Bearer 1、Bearer2……。
在多跳通信场景中，远端UE和中继EU之间协议栈中存在BAP层，而数据包中的存在BAP头，需要承载BID，从而实现远端UE的多个数据资源承载(data resource bearer，DRB)通过远端UE和中继UE之间的一个SL-DRB传输，即实现DRB与SL-DRB的N：1映射。
在这些实施例中，多跳场景协议栈如图17或如18所示。其中，在图17和图18中，以适配层为BAP为例进行说明。
其中，图17和图18的区别在于中继UE是作为两个BAP实体还是以一个BAP实体来实现远端UE和AN设备之间的中继UE。
在多条通信场景中引入BAP层来支持承载映射的情况下，且该场景中的协议栈如图17所示时，以上实施例提供的路由方法需要做以下调整：
继续以链路1为例来说明。
以下A1至A3是针对远端UE传输的数据包不具有BAP头的实施例的改动。
A1、在以上实施例提供的方法中，UE1向UE2发送不具有BAP头的数据包1时，UE2接收到数据包1后，对该数据包1添加BAP头，生成数据包2。
在本实施例中，UE1向UE2发送具有BAP头的数据包1，但是该BAP头中不包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识，仅包含承载标识。UE2接收到数据包1之后，先对数据包1进行解封装，得到不具有BAP头的数据包；然后对该数据包添加BAP头，生成数据包2。其中，数据包2的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识，以及承载标识。
A2、在以上实施例提供的方法中，AN设备向UE4发送具有BAP头的数据包3，数据包3的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识。
在本实施例中，AN设备向UE4发送具有BAP头的数据包3，数据包3的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识，还包含承载标识。
A3、在以上实施例提供的方法中，作为UE1的末尾中继UE的UE2接收到数据包4，其中，数据包4的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识。UE2对该数据包4进行解封装，得到不具有BAP头的数据包5，并将数据包5发送给UE1。
在本实施例中，作为UE1的末尾中继UE的UE2接收到数据包4，其中，数据包4的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识，还包含承载标识。UE2对该数据包4进行解封装，得到不具有BAP头的数据包；为该数据包添加BAP头，生成数据包5，并将数据包5发送给UE1，其中，数据包5的BAP头中仅包含该承载标识。
以下B1至B3是针对远端UE传输的数据包具有BAP头的实施例的改动。
B1、在以上实施例提供的方法中，UE1向UE2发送具有BAP头的数据包1，其中数 据包1的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识。
在本实施例中，UE1向UE2发送具有BAP头的数据包1，其中，数据包1的BAP头中不仅包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识，还包含承载标识。
B2、在以上实施例提供的方法中，AN设备向UE4发送具有BAP头的数据包2，数据包2的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识。
在本实施例中，AN设备向UE4发送具有BAP头的数据包2，数据包2的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识，还包含承载标识。
B3、在以上实施例提供的方法中，UE2向UE1发送具有BAP头的数据包3，数据包3的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识。
在本实施例中，UE2向UE1发送具有BAP头的数据包3，数据包3的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识，以及承载标识。即UE2不对接收的数据包3进行处理，直接转发给UE1。
在多跳通信场景中引入BAP层来支持承载映射的情况下，且该场景中的协议栈如图18所示时，以上实施例提供的路由方法需要做以下调整：
继续以链路1为例来说明。
以下C1至C3是针对远端UE传输的数据包不具有BAP头的实施例的改动。
C1、在以上实施例提供的方法中，UE1向UE2发送不具有BAP头的数据包1时，UE2接收到数据包1后，对该数据包1添加BAP头，生成数据包2。
在本实施例中，UE1向UE2发送具有BAP头的数据包1，但是该BAP头中不包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识，仅包含承载标识。UE2接收到数据包1之后，将目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识补充到数据包1的BAP头中，得到数据包2。
C2、在以上实施例提供的方法中，AN设备向UE4发送具有BAP头的数据包3，数据包3的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识。
在本实施例中，AN设备向UE4发送具有BAP头的数据包3，数据包3的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识，还包含承载标识。
C3、在以上实施例提供的方法中，作为UE1的末尾中继UE的UE2接收到数据包4，其中，数据包4的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识。UE2对该数据包4进行解封装，得到不具有BAP头的数据包5，并将数据包5发送给UE1。
在本实施例中，作为UE1的末尾中继UE的UE2接收到数据包4，其中，数据包4的BAP头中包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识，还包含承载标识。UE2对该数据包4的BAP头中的目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识进行删除，得到数据包5，并将数据包5发送给UE1，其中，数据包5的BAP头中仅包含该承载标识。
针对远端UE传输的数据包具有BAP头的实施例的改动，可以参考以上2-1至2-3，此处不再赘述。
总之，在链路1中，数据包的BAP头的处理符合图19A或图19B所示。其中以上图19A和图19B中的路由相关信息包含目标路由指示信息和目标设备标识。
实施例九：
在以上实施例中，AN设备会向每个中继UE发送至少一个路由信息。以下继续以链 路1为例进行说明。本实施例提供了一种路由信息配置方法，可以但不限于通过以下实施方式实现：
第一种实施方式：链路1中的每个中继UE均与AN设备存在Uu通信连接(或RRC连接)。因此AN设备可以分别使用与每个中继UE的Uu通信连接，向该中继UE发送为其配置的路由信息。
例如，AN设备可以使用与UE4的Uu通信连接，向UE4发送为其配置的路由信息；使用与UE3的Uu通信连接，向UE3发送为其配置的路由信息；使用与UE2的Uu通信连接，向UE2发送为其配置的路由信息。
第二种实施方式：部分中继UE可以与AN设备不建立Uu通信连接。其中，这些中继UE是指除了与AN设备之间通过Uu通信连接的中继UE之外的其他中继UE，后续可以简称为专用中继UE。例如，若某些UE自身没有与AN设备建立Uu通信连接的需求，仅是作为中继UE为其他UE提供中继服务，则该UE可以不与AN设备建立Uu通信连接。
在这种情况下，专用中继UE可以从其父中继UE获取路由信息，具体流程如下图所示。即父中继UE可以为子中继UE提供路由信息，可选的，还可以为子中继UE提供地址。
例如，在链路1中，UE4可以向UE3发送UE3的路由信息，UE3也可以向UE2发送UE2的路由信息。而在最初AN设备为头中继UE(UE4)配置路由信息时，发送的信息中就包括UE4的路由信息和至少一个第一扩展信息，每个第一扩展信息包括UE4的子中继UE(简称第一子中继UE)的指示信息(例如本地标识或索引)，以及该第一子中继UE的路由信息。可选的，若UE4的某个第一子中继UE还存在子中继UE(简称第二子中继UE)时，则第一扩展信息中还可以包括至少一个第二扩展信息，每个第二扩展信息中至少包括一个第二子中继UE的指示信息和该第二子中继UE的路由信息。
UE4会根据每个第一扩展信息中的第一子中继UE的指示信息，向该第一子中继UE发送该第一子中继UE的路由信息，以及该第一扩展信息中包含的第二扩展信息。
下面继续以链路1为例，对该链路1中的各个中继UE的路由信息配置过程进行说明。在本例中，假设UE2和UE3均为专用中继UE。
S1：AN设备向UE4发送第一消息。
第一消息中包含：UE4的路由信息；第一扩展信息(UE3的本地标识，UE3的路由信息，第二扩展信息(UE2的本地标识，UE2的路由信息))。
S2：UE4向UE3发送第二消息。
第二消息中包含：UE3的路由信息；第二扩展信息(UE2的本地标识，UE2的路由信息)。
S3：UE3向UE2发送第三消息。
第三消息中包含：UE2的路由信息。
通过以上第二种实施方式，在部分中继UE与AN设备之间不存在Uu通信连接的情况下，通信系统依然能够完成对这些中继UE的路由信息配置，从而实现远端UE和AN设备之间通过多个中继UE进行通信的路由。
还需要说明的是，以上实施例一至实施例九并不构成本申请提供的路由方法的限定。在以上实施例的基础上做出的改进和调整而得到的路由方法，也在本申请的范围内。此外， 以上实施例一至实施例九均是以U2N系统为例进行说明的，然而，以上实施例提供的方法同样可以适用于U2U系统。在U2U系统中，端到端的通信发生在两个UE之间，而在两个UE之间存在至少一个中继UE。在U2U系统应用本申请实施例提供路由方法时，可以设置由其中一端的UE执行以上实施例中AN设备的行为。
注意的是，在以上实施例中，两个UE建立的SL通信连接为SL单播通信连接。
基于相同的技术构思，本申请还提供了一种通信装置，该装置的结构如图20所示，包括通信单元2001和处理单元2002。所述通信装置2000可以应用于如图1所示的多跳通信系统，并可以实现以上实施例提供的路由方法。可选的，所述通信装置2000的物理表现形式可以为一种通信设备，例如AN设备或UE；或者所述通信装置可以能够实现通信设备的功能的其他装置，例如通信设备内部的处理器或芯片等，具体的，该通信装置2000可以为现场可编程门阵列(field-programmable gate array，FPGA)、复杂可编程逻辑器件(complex programmable logic device，CPLD)、专用集成电路(application specific intergrated circuits，ASIC)，或片上系统(System on a chip，SOC)等一些可编程的芯片。
下面对所述装置2000中的各个单元的功能进行介绍。
所述通信单元2001，用于接收和发送数据。可选的，所述通信单元2001可以通过收发器实现，例如，移动通信模块。
移动通信模块可以提供应用在所述UE上的包括2G/3G/4G/5G等无线通信的解决方案。移动通信模块可以包括至少一个天线、至少一个滤波器，开关，功率放大器，低噪声放大器(low noise amplifier，LNA)等。所述通信设备可以通过所述移动通信模块与通信系统中其他设备进行交互。
可选的，所述通信装置2000可以应用于中继终端中。下面以所述通信装置2000应用于第一中继终端为例，对所述处理单元2002的具体功能进行说明。
在一种实施方式中，所述处理单元2002，用于：
通过所述通信单元2001接收第一数据包；
获取所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息和目标设备标识，其中，所述第一路由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；所述目标设备标识所指示的目标设备为所述第一数据包的目的设备或源设备；根据所述第一路由指示信息，或者根据所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，确定第一设备；
通过所述通信单元2001向所述第一设备传输第二数据包，其中，所述第二数据包承载的数据与所述第一数据包承载数据相同。
需要说明的是，所述第二数据包承载的数据与所述第一数据包承载的数据相同，包含两种不同的含义：第一种：第一数据包和第二数据包完全相同，通信装置2000未对第一数据包进行封装或解封装处理；第二种：第二数据包与第一数据包仅承载的数据相同，且二者存在不同之处(例如协议层不同；又例如协议层相同但是某个协议层头中携带的信息不同)。通信装置2000为对所述第一数据包进行封装或解封装处理，得到所述第二数据包的。在下面不同的设计中，可以针对不同的情况具体说明。
在一种可能的设计中，所述处理单元2002，在获取所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识时，具体用于：
方式一：在所述第一数据包具有第一协议层头，所述第一协议层头中包含所述第一路 由指示信息和所述目标设备标识的情况下，从所述第一数据包的第一协议层头中获取所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；
方式二：在所述通信单元2001从第一远端终端接收所述第一数据包的情况下，所述第一数据包不具有第一协议层头；确定所述第一路由指示信息为保存的所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息，并确定所述目标设备标识为所述第一远端终端的设备标识；
方式三：在所述通信单元2001从第一远端终端接收所述第一数据包的情况下，所述第一数据包具有第一协议层，且第一协议层头中不包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；确定所述第一路由指示信息为保存的所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息，并确定所述目标设备标识为所述第一远端终端的设备标识。
在一种可能的设计中，所述处理单元2002，还用于：
通过所述通信单元2001从接入网设备获取所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息；其中，所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息为所述第一远端终端的专用路由指示信息，或者默认路由指示信息。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息中包含多个与不同承载存在对应关系的路由指示信息；所述处理单元2002，在确定所述第一路由指示信息为所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息时，具体用于：
确定传输所述第一数据包所使用的目标承载；
确定所述第一路由指示信息为：在所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息中的，与所述目标承载存在对应关系的路由指示信息。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一路由指示信息包含目的地址；所述第一数据包具有第一协议层头；
所述处理单元2002，在根据所述第一路由指示信息，或者根据所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，确定所述第一设备时，具体用于：
方式一：当所述目的地址与所述第一中继终端的地址不同时，确定所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址；确定所述第一设备为所述下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点；
方式二：当所述目的地址与所述第一中继终端的地址相同时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备；
方式三：当所述目的地址与所述第一中继终端的地址相同，且所述第一中继终端为连接接入网设备的第一个中继终端时，确定接收所述第一数据包所使用的接口；当所述接口为Uu接口时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备；当所述接口为PC5接口时，确定所述第一设备为所述接入网设备。
在一种可能的设计中，当所述第一设备为所述下一跳节点或所述接入网设备时，所述第二数据包与所述第一数据包相同。在该设计中，实际上处理单元2002未对所述第一数据包进行封装或解封装处理，而是直接转发所述第一数据包。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一路由指示信息还包含目标路径标识。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一路由指示信息包含目标路径标识；所述第一数据包具有所述第一协议层头；
所述处理单元2002，在根据所述第一路由指示信息，或者根据所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，确定所述第一设备时，具体用于：
方式一：当所述第一路由指示信息存在对应的下一跳节点设备标识时，根据所述下一跳节点设备标识，确定所述第一设备；
方式二：当所述第一路由指示信息不存在对应的下一跳节点设备标识时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备。
在一种可能的设计中，所述处理单元2002，在根据所述下一跳节点设备标识，确定所述第一设备时，具体用于：
方式一：当所述下一跳节点设备标识指示所述第一中继终端连接的第二中继终端时，确定所述第一设备为所述第二中继终端；
方式二：当所述下一跳节点设备标识指示接入网设备时，确定所述第一设备为所述接入网设备；
方式三：当所述下一跳节点设备标识指示所述第一中继终端时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备。
在一种可能的设计中，所述下一跳节点设备标识为第一默认设备标识时，所述下一跳节点设备标识指示所述第一中继终端；
所述下一跳节点设备标识为第二默认设备标识时，所述下一跳节点设备标识指示所述接入网设备。
在一种可能的设计中，当所述第一设备为所述第二中继终端或所述接入网设备时，所述第二数据包与所述第一数据包相同。在该设计中，实际上所述处理单元2002未对所述第一数据包进行封装或解封装处理，而是直接转发所述第一数据包。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一路由指示信息还包含传输方向指示，所述传输方向指示用于指示上行传输或下行传输。
在一种可能的设计中，所述处理单元2002，在确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备时，具体用于：
当所述目标设备标识指示接入所述第一中继终端的第一远端终端时，确定所述第一设备为所述第一远端终端；
所述处理单元2002，在通过所述通信单元2001向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包时，具体用于：
对所述第一数据包进行解封装，得到所述第二数据包，其中，所述第二数据包不具有第一协议层头；
通过所述通信单元2001向所述第一远端终端传输所述第二数据包。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一协议层头中还包含承载标识，所述承载标识用于指示传输所述第一数据包所使用的目标承载；所述处理单元2002，在确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备时，具体用于：
当所述目标设备标识指示接入所述第一中继终端的第一远端终端时，确定所述第一设备为所述第一远端终端；
所述处理单元2002，在通过所述通信单元2001向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包时，具体用于：
方式一：对所述第一数据包中所述第一协议层中包含的第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识删除，得到所述第二数据包，所述第二数据包中的第一协议层头中包含所述承载标识；通过所述通信单元2001向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包；
方式二：对所述第一数据包进行解封装，得到目标数据包；其中，所述目标数据包不具有第一协议层头；为所述目标数据包进行添加第一协议层头，生成所述第二数据包，其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述承载标识；通过所述通信单元2001向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包；
方式三：通过所述通信单元2001向所述第一设备传输与所述第一数据包相同的所述第二数据包。即所述处理单元2002未对所述第一数据包进行封装或解封装处理，而是直接转发所述第一数据包。
在一种可能的设计中，所述处理单元2002还用于：
当所述目标设备标识指示所述第一中继终端时，确定所述第一数据包中承载的数据为所述第一中继终端的数据。
在一种可能的设计中，当所述目标设备标识为第三默认设备标识时，所述目标设备标识指示所述第一中继终端。
在一种可能的设计中，当所述第一数据包不具有第一协议层头时，所述处理单元2002，在通过所述通信单元2001向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包时，具体用于：
为所述第一数据包添加第一协议层头，生成所述第二数据包；其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；
通过所述通信单元2001向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包。
在一种可能的设计中，在所述第一中继终端通过第二中继终端连接接入网设备的情况下，所述处理单元2002还用于：
生成第三数据包，其中，所述第三数据包不包含第一协议层头；
方式一：通过所述通信单元2001向所述第二中继终端传输所述第三数据包；
方式二：确定所述第三数据包的第二路由指示信息；为所述第三数据包添加第一协议层头，生成第四数据包；并通过所述通信单元2001向所述第二中继终端传输所述第四数据包；其中，所述第四数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述第二路由指示信息和所述第一中继终端的设备标识。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一中继终端的设备标识为所述第二中继终端为所述第一中继终端分配的；或者，所述第一中继终端的设备标识为所述第一中继终端为所述第二中继终端分配的；或者所述第一中继终端的设备标识为第一默认设备标识。
在一种可能的设计中，所述处理单元2002，在通过所述通信单元2001向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包时，具体用于：
使用第一逻辑信道，通过所述通信单元2001向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包；
所述处理单元2002，在通过所述通信单元2001向所述第二中继终端传输所述第三数据包时，具体用于：
使用第二逻辑信道，通过所述通信单元2001向所述第二中继终端传输所述第三数据包；
其中，所述第一逻辑信道与所述第二逻辑信道不同。
在一种可能的设计中，当所述第一数据包具有第一协议层头，且第一协议层头中包含承载标识、不包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识时，所述处理单元2002，在通过所述通信单元2001向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包时，具体用于：
通过以下两种方式得到所述第二数据包：
方式一：将所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识添加到所述第一数据包的第一协议层头中，得到所述第二数据包，所述第二数据包中的第一协议层头中包含所述承载标识、所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；
方式二：对所述第一数据包进行解封装，得到目标数据包；其中，所述目标数据包不具有第一协议层头；为所述目标数据包添加第一协议层头，生成所述第二数据包，其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述承载标识、所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；
通过所述通信单元2001向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包。
在一种可能的设计中，所述处理单元2002，在确定所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址时，具体用于：
在保存的至少一个路由信息中，确定包含所述第一路由指示信息的目标路由信息；其中，所述目标路由信息包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址；
在所述目标路由信息中确定所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址。
在一种可能的设计中，所述处理单元2002，还用于：
当在保存的至少一个路由信息中，确定包含所述第一路由指示信息的目标路由信息时，确定所述第一路由指示信息存在对应的下一跳节点设备标识；其中，所述目标路由信息包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点设备标识；
当在保存的所述至少一个路由信息中，未查找到所述目标路由信息时，确定所述第一路由指示信息不存在对应的下一跳节点设备标识。
在一种可能的设计中，所述处理单元2002，还用于：
通过所述通信单元2001从接入网设备获取所述至少一个路由信息；或者在所述第一中继终端通过第二中继终端连接接入网设备的情况下，通过所述通信单元2001从所述第二中继终端获取所述至少一个路由信息。
在一种可能的设计中，所述目标设备标识为所述目标设备的本地标识local ID或层2标识L2 ID。
在另一种实施方式中，所述处理单元2002，用于：
通过所述通信单元2001接收第一数据包，其中，所述第一数据包中具有第一协议层头，所述第一协议层头中包含第一路由指示信息和目标设备标识，所述第一路由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；所述目标设备标识所指示的目标设备为所述第一数据包的目的设备或源设备；
从所述第一数据包中获取所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；
根据所述第一路由指示信息，或者根据所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，确定第一设备；
通过所述通信单元2001向所述第一设备传输所述第一数据包。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一路由指示信息包含目标节点地址；所述处理单元2002，在根据所述第一路由指示信息，或者根据所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，确定所述第一设备时，具体用于：
方式一：当所述目标节点地址与所述第一中继终端的地址不同时，确定所述第一路由 指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址；确定所述第一设备为所述下一跳节点地址所指示的下一跳节点；
方式二：当所述目标节点地址与所述第一中继终端的地址相同时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备；
方式三：当所述目标节点地址与所述第一中继终端的地址相同，且所述第一中继终端为连接接入网设备的第一个中继终端时，所述第一中继终端确定接收所述第一数据包所使用的接口；当所述接口为Uu接口时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备；当所述接口为PC5接口时，确定所述第一设备为所述接入网设备。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一路由指示信息还包含目标路径标识。
在一种可能的设计中，所述处理单元2002，在确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备时，具体用于：
当所述目标设备标识指示接入所述第一中继终端的第一远端终端时，确定所述第一设备为所述第一远端终端。
在一种可能的设计中，所述处理单元2002，还用于当所述目标设备标识指示所述第一中继终端时，确定所述第一数据包中承载的数据为所述第一中继终端的数据。
在一种可能的设计中，当所述目标设备标识为默认设备标识时，所述目标设备标识指示所述第一中继终端。
在一种可能的设计中，所述处理单元2002，在确定所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址时，具体用于：
在保存的至少一个路由信息中，确定包含所述第一路由指示信息的目标路由信息；其中，所述目标路由信息包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址；
在所述目标路由信息中确定所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点地址。
在一种可能的设计中，所述处理单元2002还用于：
通过所述通信单元2001从接入网设备获取所述至少一个路由信息；或者在所述第一中继终端通过第二中继终端连接接入网设备的情况下，通过所述通信单元2001从所述第二中继终端获取所述至少一个路由信息。
在一种可能的设计中，所述目标设备标识为所述目标设备的本地标识local ID。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第一数据包的第一协议层头中还包含承载标识；所述承载标识用于指示传输所述第一数据包所使用的第一承载。
可选的，所述通信装置2000还可以应用于AN设备中。下面对所述处理单元2002的具体功能进行说明。
处理单元2002，用于：
获取第一数据包，所述第一数据包不具有第一协议层头；
确定所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息和第一目标设备标识，其中，所述第一目标设备标识所指示的第一目标设备为所述第一数据包的目的设备，所述第一路由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；
为所述第一数据包添加第一协议层头，生成第二数据包；其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述第一目标设备标识；
根据所述第一路由指示信息，确定中继终端；
通过所述通信单元2001向所述中继终端传输第二数据包。
在一种可能的设计中，所述处理单元2002还用于：
通过所述通信单元2001接收所述中继终端发送的第三数据包；其中，所述第三数据包具有第一协议层头，所述第三数据包的第一协议层头中包含第二路由指示信息和第二目标设备标识；所述第二目标设备标识所指示的第二目标设备为所述第三数据包的源设备，所述第二路由指示信息用于指示所述第三数据包的传输路由；
对所述第三数据包进行解封装，得到第四数据包，所述第四数据包不具有第一协议层头。
在一种可能的设计中，所述处理单元2002，还用于：
确定所述第一数据包的第一承载标识；其中，所述第一承载标识用于指示传输所述第一数据包所使用的第一承载；
所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中还包含所述第一承载标识。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第三数据包的第一协议层头中还包含第二承载标识，所述第二承载标识用于指示传输所述第三数据包所使用的第二承载。
可选的，所述通信装置2000还可以应用于远端终端中。下面对所述处理单元2002的具体功能进行说明。
处理单元2002，用于：
获取第一数据包；
确定所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息、目标设备标识，所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；所述目标设备标识为所述远端终端的设备标识；
为所述第一数据包添加第一协议层头，生成第二数据包；其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述第一路由指示信息、所述第一目标设备标识；
通过所述通信单元2001向中继终端发送所述第二数据包。
在一种可能的设计中，所述处理单元2002还用于：
通过所述通信单元2001接收来自所述中继终端的第三数据包，其中，所述第三数据包具有第一协议层头，所述第三数据包的第一协议层头中包含第二路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；所述第二路由指示信息用于指示所述第二数据包的传输路由；
对所述第三数据包进行解封装，得到第四数据包，所述第四数据包不具有第一协议层头。
在一种可能的设计中，所述处理单元2002还用于：
确定所述第一数据包的第一承载标识；其中，所述第一承载标识用于指示传输所述第一数据包所使用的第一承载；
所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中还包含所述第一承载标识。
在一种可能的设计中，所述第三数据包的第一协议层头中还包含第二承载标识，所述第二承载标识用于指示传输所述第三数据包所使用的第二承载。
在一种可能的设计中，所述处理单元2002，在确定所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息时，具体用于：
确定所述第一路由指示信息为保存的所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息。
在一种可能的设计中，所述处理单元2002还用于：
通过所述通信单元2001从接入网设备或所述中继终端接收使所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息，所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息为所述第一远端终端的专用路由指示信息，或者默认的路由指示信息。
需要说明的是，本申请以上实施例中对模块的划分是示意性的，仅仅为一种逻辑功能划分，实际实现时可以有另外的划分方式，另外，在本申请各个实施例中的各功能单元可以集成在一个处理单元中，也可以是单独物理存在，也可以两个或两个以上单元集成在一个单元中。上述集成的单元既可以采用硬件的形式实现，也可以采用软件功能单元的形式实现。
所述集成的单元如果以软件功能单元的形式实现并作为独立的产品销售或使用时，可以存储在一个计算机可读取存储介质中。基于这样的理解，本申请的技术方案本质上或者说对现有技术做出贡献的部分或者该技术方案的全部或部分可以以软件产品的形式体现出来，该计算机软件产品存储在一个存储介质中，包括若干指令用以使得一台计算机设备(可以是个人计算机，服务器，或者网络设备等)或处理器(processor)执行本申请各个实施例所述方法的全部或部分步骤。而前述的存储介质包括：U盘、移动硬盘、只读存储器(Read-Only Memory，ROM)、随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory，RAM)、磁碟或者光盘等各种可以存储程序代码的介质。
基于相同的技术构思，本申请还提供了一种通信设备，所述通信设备可以应用于如图1所示的多跳通信系统中，可以实现以上实施例提供的路由方法，具有图20所示的通信装置2000的功能。参阅图21所示，所述通信设备2100包括：收发器2101、处理器2102以及存储器2103。其中，所述收发器2101、所述处理器2102以及所述存储器2103之间相互连接。
可选的，所述收发器2101、所述处理器2102以及所述存储器2103之间通过总线2104相互连接。所述总线2104可以是外设部件互连标准(peripheral component interconnect，PCI)总线或扩展工业标准结构(extended industry standard architecture，EISA)总线等。所述总线可以分为地址总线、数据总线、控制总线等。为便于表示，图21中仅用一条粗线表示，但并不表示仅有一根总线或一种类型的总线。
所述收发器2101，用于接收和发送数据，实现与其他设备之间的通信交互。
可选的，所述通信设备2100可以为中继终端中。下面以所述通信设备2100应用于第一中继终端为例，对所述处理器2102的具体功能进行说明。
在一种实施方式中，所述处理器2102，用于：
通过所述收发器2101接收第一数据包；
获取所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息和目标设备标识，其中，所述第一路由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；所述目标设备标识所指示的目标设备为所述第一数据包的目的设备或源设备；根据所述第一路由指示信息，或者根据所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，确定第一设备；
通过所述收发器2101向所述第一设备传输第二数据包，其中，所述第二数据包承载 的数据与所述第一数据包承载数据相同。
在另一种实施方式中，所述处理器2102，用于：
通过所述收发器2101接收第一数据包，其中，所述第一数据包中具有第一协议层头，所述第一协议层头中包含第一路由指示信息和目标设备标识，所述第一路由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；所述目标设备标识所指示的目标设备为所述第一数据包的目的设备或源设备；
从所述第一数据包中获取所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；
根据所述第一路由指示信息，或者根据所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，确定第一设备；
通过所述收发器2101向所述第一设备传输所述第一数据包。
可选的，所述通信设备2100还可以应用于AN设备中。下面对所述处理器2102的具体功能进行说明。
处理器2102，用于：
获取第一数据包，所述第一数据包不具有第一协议层头；
确定所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息和第一目标设备标识，其中，所述第一目标设备标识所指示的第一目标设备为所述第一数据包的目的设备，所述第一路由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；
为所述第一数据包添加第一协议层头，生成第二数据包；其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述第一目标设备标识；
根据所述第一路由指示信息，确定中继终端；
通过所述收发器2101向所述中继终端传输第二数据包。
可选的，所述通信设备2100还可以应用于远端终端中。下面对所述处理器2102的具体功能进行说明。
处理器2102，用于：
获取第一数据包；
确定所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息、目标设备标识，所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；所述目标设备标识为所述远端终端的设备标识；
为所述第一数据包添加第一协议层头，生成第二数据包；其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述第一路由指示信息、所述第一目标设备标识；
通过所述收发器2101向中继终端发送所述第二数据包。
需要说明的是，本实施例不对所述处理器2102的具体功能进行详细描述，所述处理器2102的具体功能可以参考以上实施例以及实例提供的路由方法中的描述，以及图20所示实施例中对所述通信装置2000的具体功能描述，此处不再赘述。
所述存储器2103，用于存放程序指令和数据等。具体地，程序指令可以包括程序代码，该程序代码包括计算机操作指令。存储器2103可能包含随机存取存储器(random access memory，RAM)，也可能还包括非易失性存储器(non-volatile memory)，例如至少一个磁盘存储器。处理器2102执行存储器2103所存放的程序指令，并使用所述存储器2103中 存储的数据，实现上述功能，从而实现上述实施例提供的路由方法。
可以理解，本申请图21中的存储器2103可以是易失性存储器或非易失性存储器，或可包括易失性和非易失性存储器两者。其中，非易失性存储器可以是只读存储器(Read-Only Memory，ROM)、可编程只读存储器(Programmable ROM，PROM)、可擦除可编程只读存储器(Erasable PROM，EPROM)、电可擦除可编程只读存储器(Electrically EPROM，EEPROM)或闪存。易失性存储器可以是随机存取存储器(Random Access Memory，RAM)，其用作外部高速缓存。通过示例性但不是限制性说明，许多形式的RAM可用，例如静态随机存取存储器(Static RAM，SRAM)、动态随机存取存储器(Dynamic RAM，DRAM)、同步动态随机存取存储器(Synchronous DRAM，SDRAM)、双倍数据速率同步动态随机存取存储器(Double Data Rate SDRAM，DDR SDRAM)、增强型同步动态随机存取存储器(Enhanced SDRAM，ESDRAM)、同步连接动态随机存取存储器(Synchlink DRAM，SLDRAM)和直接内存总线随机存取存储器(Direct Rambus RAM，DR RAM)。应注意，本文描述的系统和方法的存储器旨在包括但不限于这些和任意其它适合类型的存储器。
基于以上实施例，本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行以上实施例提供的路由方法。
基于以上实施例，本申请实施例还提供了一种计算机可读存储介质，该计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序，所述计算机程序被计算机执行时，使得计算机执行以上实施例提供的路由方法。
其中，存储介质可以是计算机能够存取的任何可用介质。以此为例但不限于：计算机可读介质可以包括RAM、ROM、EEPROM、CD-ROM或其他光盘存储、磁盘存储介质或者其他磁存储设备、或者能够用于携带或存储具有指令或数据结构形式的期望的程序代码并能够由计算机存取的任何其他介质。
基于以上实施例，本申请实施例还提供了一种芯片，所述芯片用于读取存储器中存储的计算机程序，实现以上实施例提供的路由方法。
基于以上实施例，本申请实施例提供了一种芯片系统，该芯片系统包括处理器，用于支持计算机装置实现以上实施例中各通信设备所涉及的功能。在一种可能的设计中，所述芯片系统还包括存储器，所述存储器用于保存该计算机装置必要的程序和数据。该芯片系统，可以由芯片构成，也可以包含芯片和其他分立器件。
综上所述，本申请实施例提供了一种路由方法及装置，该方法可以以中继UE的地址、远端UE的地址、AN设备的地址，或路由标识等作为路由指示信息来指导数据包的路由传输，从而可以保证在多跳通信场景中实现AN设备与远端UE之间的路由。
本领域内的技术人员应明白，本申请的实施例可提供为方法、系统、或计算机程序产品。因此，本申请可采用完全硬件实施例、完全软件实施例、或结合软件和硬件方面的实施例的形式。而且，本申请可采用在一个或多个其中包含有计算机可用程序代码的计算机可用存储介质(包括但不限于磁盘存储器、CD-ROM、光学存储器等)上实施的计算机程序产品的形式。
本申请是参照根据本申请的方法、设备(系统)、和计算机程序产品的流程图和/或方框图来描述的。应理解可由计算机程序指令实现流程图和/或方框图中的每一流程和/或方框、以及流程图和/或方框图中的流程和/或方框的结合。可提供这些计算机程序指 令到通用计算机、专用计算机、嵌入式处理机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器以产生一个机器，使得通过计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备的处理器执行的指令产生用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的装置。
这些计算机程序指令也可存储在能引导计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备以特定方式工作的计算机可读存储器中，使得存储在该计算机可读存储器中的指令产生包括指令装置的制造品，该指令装置实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能。
这些计算机程序指令也可装载到计算机或其他可编程数据处理设备上，使得在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行一系列操作步骤以产生计算机实现的处理，从而在计算机或其他可编程设备上执行的指令提供用于实现在流程图一个流程或多个流程和/或方框图一个方框或多个方框中指定的功能的步骤。
显然，本领域的技术人员可以对本申请进行各种改动和变型而不脱离本申请的保护范围。这样，倘若本申请的这些修改和变型属于本申请权利要求及其等同技术的范围之内，则本申请也意图包含这些改动和变型在内。

Claims (85)

  1. 一种路由方法，应用于第一中继终端中，其特征在于，包括：
    接收第一数据包；
    获取所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息和目标设备标识，其中，所述第一路由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；所述目标设备标识所指示的目标设备为所述第一数据包的目的设备或源设备；
    根据所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，确定第一设备；
    向所述第一设备传输第二数据包，其中，所述第二数据包承载的数据与所述第一数据包承载的数据相同。
  2. 如权利要求1所述的方法，其特征在于，获取所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，包括：
    所述第一数据包具有第一协议层头，所述第一协议层头中包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；从所述第一数据包的第一协议层头中获取所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；或者
    在从第一远端终端接收所述第一数据包的情况下，所述第一数据包不具有第一协议层头；确定所述第一路由指示信息为保存的所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息，并确定所述目标设备标识为所述第一远端终端的设备标识；或者
    在从第一远端终端接收所述第一数据包的情况下，所述第一数据包具有第一协议层，且第一协议层头中不包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；确定所述第一路由指示信息为保存的所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息，并确定所述目标设备标识为所述第一远端终端的设备标识。
  3. 如权利要求2所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    从接入网设备获取所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息；其中，所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息为所述第一远端终端的专用路由指示信息，或者默认路由指示信息。
  4. 如权利要求2或3所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息中包含多个与不同承载存在对应关系的路由指示信息；
    确定所述第一路由指示信息为所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息，包括：
    确定传输所述第一数据包所使用的目标承载；
    确定所述第一路由指示信息为：在所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息中的，与所述目标承载存在对应关系的路由指示信息。
  5. 如权利要求2-4任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一路由指示信息包含目的地址；所述第一数据包具有第一协议层头；
    根据所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，确定所述第一设备，包括：
    当所述目的地址与所述第一中继终端的地址相同时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备；或者
    当所述目的地址与所述第一中继终端的地址相同，且所述第一中继终端为连接接入网设备的第一个中继终端时，确定接收所述第一数据包所使用的接口；当所述接口为Uu接口时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备；当所述接口为PC5接口时，确定所述第一设备为所述接入网设备。
  6. 如权利要求5所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述第一设备为所述接入网设备时，所述第二数据包与所述第一数据包相同。
  7. 如权利要求5或6所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一路由指示信息还包含目标路径标识。
  8. 如权利要求2-4任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一路由指示信息包含目标路径标识；所述第一数据包具有所述第一协议层头；
    根据所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，确定所述第一设备，包括：
    当所述第一路由指示信息不存在对应的下一跳节点设备标识时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备。
  9. 如权利要求8所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一路由指示信息还包含传输方向指示，所述传输方向指示用于指示上行传输或下行传输。
  10. 如权利要求5-9中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备，包括：
    当所述目标设备标识指示接入所述第一中继终端的第一远端终端时，确定所述第一设备为所述第一远端终端；
    向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包，包括：
    对所述第一数据包进行解封装，得到所述第二数据包，其中，所述第二数据包不具有第一协议层头；
    向所述第一远端终端传输所述第二数据包。
  11. 如权利要求5-9中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一协议层头中还包含承载标识，所述承载标识用于指示传输所述第一数据包所使用的目标承载；确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备，包括：
    当所述目标设备标识指示接入所述第一中继终端的第一远端终端时，确定所述第一设备为所述第一远端终端；
    向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包，包括：
    对所述第一数据包中所述第一协议层中包含的第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识删除，得到所述第二数据包，所述第二数据包中的第一协议层头中包含所述承载标识；向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包；或者
    对所述第一数据包进行解封装，得到目标数据包；其中，所述目标数据包不具有第一协议层头；为所述目标数据包进行添加第一协议层头，生成所述第二数据包，其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述承载标识；向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包；或者
    向所述第一设备传输与所述第一数据包相同的所述第二数据包。
  12. 如权利要求10或11所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    当所述目标设备标识指示所述第一中继终端时，确定所述第一数据包中承载的数据为所述第一中继终端的数据。
  13. 如权利要求12所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述目标设备标识为默认设备标识时，所述目标设备标识指示所述第一中继终端。
  14. 如权利要求5-10任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述第一数据包不具有第一协议层头时，向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包，包括：
    为所述第一数据包添加第一协议层头，生成所述第二数据包；其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；
    向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包。
  15. 如权利要求14所述的方法，其特征在于，在所述第一中继终端通过第二中继终端连接接入网设备的情况下，所述方法还包括：
    生成第三数据包，其中，所述第三数据包不包含第一协议层头；
    向所述第二中继终端传输所述第三数据包；或者
    确定所述第三数据包的第二路由指示信息；为所述第三数据包添加第一协议层头，生成第四数据包；并向所述第二中继终端传输所述第四数据包；其中，所述第四数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述第二路由指示信息和所述第一中继终端的设备标识。
  16. 如权利要求15所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一中继终端的设备标识为所述第二中继终端为所述第一中继终端分配的；或者，所述第一中继终端的设备标识为所述第一中继终端为所述第二中继终端分配的；或者所述第一中继终端的设备标识为第一默认设备标识。
  17. 如权利要求15或16所述的方法，其特征在于，
    向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包，包括：
    使用第一逻辑信道，向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包；
    向所述第二中继终端传输所述第三数据包，包括：
    使用第二逻辑信道，向所述第二中继终端传输所述第三数据包；
    其中，所述第一逻辑信道与所述第二逻辑信道不同。
  18. 如权利要求5-9，或11中任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述第一数据包具有第一协议层头，且第一协议层头中包含承载标识、不包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识时，向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包，包括：
    将所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识添加到所述第一数据包的第一协议层头中，得到所述第二数据包，所述第二数据包中的第一协议层头中包含所述承载标识、所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；或者
    对所述第一数据包进行解封装，得到目标数据包；其中，所述目标数据包不具有第一协议层头；为所述目标数据包添加第一协议层头，生成所述第二数据包，其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述承载标识、所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；或者
    向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包。
  19. 如权利要求8或9所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    当在保存的所述至少一个路由信息中，未查找到目标路由信息时，确定所述第一路由指示信息不存在对应的下一跳节点设备标识；其中，所述目标路由信息包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点设备标识。
  20. 如权利要求19所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    从接入网设备获取所述至少一个路由信息；或者
    在所述第一中继终端通过第二中继终端连接接入网设备的情况下，从所述第二中继终端获取所述至少一个路由信息。
  21. 如权利要求1-20任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标设备标识为所述目标 设备的本地标识local ID或层2标识L2 ID。
  22. 一种路由方法，应用于接入网设备中，其特征在于，包括：
    获取第一数据包，所述第一数据包不具有第一协议层头；
    确定所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息和第一目标设备标识，其中，所述第一目标设备标识所指示的第一目标设备为所述第一数据包的目的设备，所述第一路由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；
    为所述第一数据包添加第一协议层头，生成第二数据包；其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述第一目标设备标识；
    根据所述第一路由指示信息，确定中继终端；
    向所述中继终端传输第二数据包。
  23. 如权利要求22所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收所述中继终端发送的第三数据包；其中，所述第三数据包具有第一协议层头，所述第三数据包的第一协议层头中包含第二路由指示信息和第二目标设备标识；所述第二目标设备标识所指示的第二目标设备为所述第三数据包的源设备，所述第二路由指示信息用于指示所述第三数据包的传输路由；
    对所述第三数据包进行解封装，得到第四数据包，所述第四数据包不具有第一协议层头。
  24. 如权利要求22所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    确定所述第一数据包的第一承载标识；其中，所述第一承载标识用于指示传输所述第一数据包所使用的第一承载；
    所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中还包含所述第一承载标识。
  25. 如权利要求23所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三数据包的第一协议层头中还包含第二承载标识，所述第二承载标识用于指示传输所述第三数据包所使用的第二承载。
  26. 一种路由方法，应用于远端终端中，其特征在于，包括：
    获取第一数据包；
    确定所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息、目标设备标识，所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；所述目标设备标识为所述远端终端的设备标识；
    为所述第一数据包添加第一协议层头，生成第二数据包；其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述第一路由指示信息、所述第一目标设备标识；
    向中继终端发送所述第二数据包。
  27. 如权利要求26所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    接收来自所述中继终端的第三数据包，其中，所述第三数据包具有第一协议层头，所述第三数据包的第一协议层头中包含第二路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；所述第二路由指示信息用于指示所述第二数据包的传输路由；
    对所述第三数据包进行解封装，得到第四数据包，所述第四数据包不具有第一协议层头。
  28. 如权利要求26所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    确定所述第一数据包的第一承载标识；其中，所述第一承载标识用于指示传输所述第一数据包所使用的第一承载；
    所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中还包含所述第一承载标识。
  29. 如权利要求27所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第三数据包的第一协议层头中还包含第二承载标识，所述第二承载标识用于指示传输所述第三数据包所使用的第二承载。
  30. 如权利要求26-29任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，确定所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息，包括：
    确定所述第一路由指示信息为保存的所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息。
  31. 如权利要求30所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    从接入网设备或所述中继终端接收使所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息，所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息为所述第一远端终端的专用路由指示信息，或者默认的路由指示信息。
  32. 一种路由方法，应用于第一中继终端中，其特征在于，包括：
    接收第一数据包，其中，所述第一数据包中具有第一协议层头，所述第一协议层头中包含第一路由指示信息和目标设备标识，所述第一路由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；所述目标设备标识所指示的目标设备为所述第一数据包的目的设备或源设备；
    从所述第一数据包中获取所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；
    根据所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，确定第一设备；
    向所述第一设备传输所述第一数据包。
  33. 如权利要求32所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一路由指示信息包含目标节点地址；根据所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，确定所述第一设备，包括：
    当所述目标节点地址与所述第一中继终端的地址相同时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备；或者
    当所述目标节点地址与所述第一中继终端的地址相同，且所述第一中继终端为连接接入网设备的第一个中继终端时，所述第一中继终端确定接收所述第一数据包所使用的接口；当所述接口为Uu接口时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备；当所述接口为PC5接口时，确定所述第一设备为所述接入网设备。
  34. 如权利要求33所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一路由指示信息还包含目标路径标识。
  35. 如权利要求33或34所述的方法，其特征在于，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备，包括：
    当所述目标设备标识指示接入所述第一中继终端的第一远端终端时，确定所述第一设备为所述第一远端终端。
  36. 如权利要求35所述的方法，其特征在于，所述方法还包括：
    当所述目标设备标识指示所述第一中继终端时，确定所述第一数据包中承载的数据为所述第一中继终端的数据。
  37. 如权利要求36所述的方法，其特征在于，当所述目标设备标识为默认设备标识时，所述目标设备标识指示所述第一中继终端。
  38. 如权利要求32-37任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述目标设备标识为所述目标设备的本地标识local ID。
  39. 如权利要求32-38任一项所述的方法，其特征在于，所述第一数据包的第一协议层头中还包含承载标识；所述承载标识用于指示传输所述第一数据包所使用的第一承载。
  40. 一种通信装置，应用于第一中继终端中，其特征在于，包括：
    通信单元，用于接收和发送数据；
    所述处理单元，用于：
    通过所述通信单元接收第一数据包；
    获取所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息和目标设备标识，其中，所述第一路由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；所述目标设备标识所指示的目标设备为所述第一数据包的目的设备或源设备；根据所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，确定第一设备；
    通过所述通信单元向所述第一设备传输第二数据包，其中，所述第二数据包承载的数据与所述第一数据包承载数据相同。
  41. 如权利要求40所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元，在获取所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识时，具体用于：
    在所述第一数据包具有第一协议层头，所述第一协议层头中包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识的情况下，从所述第一数据包的第一协议层头中获取所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；或者
    在所述通信单元从第一远端终端接收所述第一数据包的情况下，所述第一数据包不具有第一协议层头；确定所述第一路由指示信息为保存的所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息，并确定所述目标设备标识为所述第一远端终端的设备标识；或者
    在所述通信单元从第一远端终端接收所述第一数据包的情况下，所述第一数据包具有第一协议层，且第一协议层头中不包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；确定所述第一路由指示信息为保存的所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息，并确定所述目标设备标识为所述第一远端终端的设备标识。
  42. 如权利要求41所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元，还用于：
    通过所述通信单元从接入网设备获取所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息；其中，所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息为所述第一远端终端的专用路由指示信息，或者默认路由指示信息。
  43. 如权利要求41或42所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息中包含多个与不同承载存在对应关系的路由指示信息；所述处理单元，在确定所述第一路由指示信息为所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息时，具体用于：
    确定传输所述第一数据包所使用的目标承载；
    确定所述第一路由指示信息为：在所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息中的，与所述目标承载存在对应关系的路由指示信息。
  44. 如权利要求41-43任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一路由指示信息包含目的地址；所述第一数据包具有第一协议层头；
    所述处理单元，在根据所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，确定所述第一设备时，具体用于：
    当所述目的地址与所述第一中继终端的地址相同时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备；或者
    当所述目的地址与所述第一中继终端的地址相同，且所述第一中继终端为连接接入网设备的第一个中继终端时，确定接收所述第一数据包所使用的接口；当所述接口为Uu接 口时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备；当所述接口为PC5接口时，确定所述第一设备为所述接入网设备。
  45. 如权利要求44所述的装置，其特征在于，当所述第一设备为所述接入网设备时，所述第二数据包与所述第一数据包相同。
  46. 如权利要求44或45所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一路由指示信息还包含目标路径标识。
  47. 如权利要求41-43任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一路由指示信息包含目标路径标识；所述第一数据包具有所述第一协议层头；
    所述处理单元，在根据所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，确定所述第一设备时，具体用于：
    当所述第一路由指示信息不存在对应的下一跳节点设备标识时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备。
  48. 如权利要求47所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一路由指示信息还包含传输方向指示，所述传输方向指示用于指示上行传输或下行传输。
  49. 如权利要求44-48中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元，在确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备时，具体用于：
    当所述目标设备标识指示接入所述第一中继终端的第一远端终端时，确定所述第一设备为所述第一远端终端；
    所述处理单元，在通过所述通信单元向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包时，具体用于：
    对所述第一数据包进行解封装，得到所述第二数据包，其中，所述第二数据包不具有第一协议层头；
    通过所述通信单元向所述第一远端终端传输所述第二数据包。
  50. 如权利要求44-48中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一协议层头中还包含承载标识，所述承载标识用于指示传输所述第一数据包所使用的目标承载；所述处理单元，在确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备时，具体用于：
    当所述目标设备标识指示接入所述第一中继终端的第一远端终端时，确定所述第一设备为所述第一远端终端；
    所述处理单元，在通过所述通信单元向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包时，具体用于：
    对所述第一数据包中所述第一协议层中包含的第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识删除，得到所述第二数据包，所述第二数据包中的第一协议层头中包含所述承载标识；通过所述通信单元向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包；或者
    对所述第一数据包进行解封装，得到目标数据包；其中，所述目标数据包不具有第一协议层头；为所述目标数据包进行添加第一协议层头，生成所述第二数据包，其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述承载标识；通过所述通信单元向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包；或者
    通过所述通信单元向所述第一设备传输与所述第一数据包相同的所述第二数据包。
  51. 如权利要求49或50所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元还用于：
    当所述目标设备标识指示所述第一中继终端时，确定所述第一数据包中承载的数据为 所述第一中继终端的数据。
  52. 如权利要求51所述的装置，其特征在于，当所述目标设备标识为默认设备标识时，所述目标设备标识指示所述第一中继终端。
  53. 如权利要求44-49任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，当所述第一数据包不具有第一协议层头时，所述处理单元，在通过所述通信单元向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包时，具体用于：
    为所述第一数据包添加第一协议层头，生成所述第二数据包；其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；
    通过所述通信单元向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包。
  54. 如权利要求53所述的装置，其特征在于，在所述第一中继终端通过第二中继终端连接接入网设备的情况下，所述处理单元还用于：
    生成第三数据包，其中，所述第三数据包不包含第一协议层头；
    通过所述通信单元向所述第二中继终端传输所述第三数据包；或者
    确定所述第三数据包的第二路由指示信息；为所述第三数据包添加第一协议层头，生成第四数据包；并通过所述通信单元向所述第二中继终端传输所述第四数据包；其中，所述第四数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述第二路由指示信息和所述第一中继终端的设备标识。
  55. 如权利要求54所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一中继终端的设备标识为所述第二中继终端为所述第一中继终端分配的；或者，所述第一中继终端的设备标识为所述第一中继终端为所述第二中继终端分配的；或者所述第一中继终端的设备标识为第一默认设备标识。
  56. 如权利要求54或55所述的装置，其特征在于，
    所述处理单元，在通过所述通信单元向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包时，具体用于：
    使用第一逻辑信道，通过所述通信单元向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包；
    所述处理单元，在通过所述通信单元向所述第二中继终端传输所述第三数据包时，具体用于：
    使用第二逻辑信道，通过所述通信单元向所述第二中继终端传输所述第三数据包；
    其中，所述第一逻辑信道与所述第二逻辑信道不同。
  57. 如权利要求44-48，或50中任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，当所述第一数据包具有第一协议层头，且第一协议层头中包含承载标识、不包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识时，所述处理单元，在通过所述通信单元向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包时，具体用于：
    将所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识添加到所述第一数据包的第一协议层头中，得到所述第二数据包，所述第二数据包中的第一协议层头中包含所述承载标识、所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；或者
    对所述第一数据包进行解封装，得到目标数据包；其中，所述目标数据包不具有第一协议层头；为所述目标数据包添加第一协议层头，生成所述第二数据包，其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述承载标识、所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；或者
    通过所述通信单元向所述第一设备传输所述第二数据包。
  58. 如权利要求47或48所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元，还用于：
    当在保存的所述至少一个路由信息中，未查找到目标路由信息时，确定所述第一路由指示信息不存在对应的下一跳节点设备标识；其中，所述目标路由信息包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述第一路由指示信息对应的下一跳节点设备标识。
  59. 如权利要求58所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元，还用于：
    通过所述通信单元从接入网设备获取所述至少一个路由信息；或者
    在所述第一中继终端通过第二中继终端连接接入网设备的情况下，通过所述通信单元从所述第二中继终端获取所述至少一个路由信息。
  60. 如权利要求40-59任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述目标设备标识为所述目标设备的本地标识local ID或层2标识L2 ID。
  61. 一种通信装置，应用于接入网设备中，其特征在于，包括：
    通信单元，用于接收和发送数据；
    处理单元，用于：
    获取第一数据包，所述第一数据包不具有第一协议层头；
    确定所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息和第一目标设备标识，其中，所述第一目标设备标识所指示的第一目标设备为所述第一数据包的目的设备，所述第一路由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；
    为所述第一数据包添加第一协议层头，生成第二数据包；其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述第一路由指示信息和所述第一目标设备标识；
    根据所述第一路由指示信息，确定中继终端；
    通过所述通信单元向所述中继终端传输第二数据包。
  62. 如权利要求61所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元还用于：
    通过所述通信单元接收所述中继终端发送的第三数据包；其中，所述第三数据包具有第一协议层头，所述第三数据包的第一协议层头中包含第二路由指示信息和第二目标设备标识；所述第二目标设备标识所指示的第二目标设备为所述第三数据包的源设备，所述第二路由指示信息用于指示所述第三数据包的传输路由；
    对所述第三数据包进行解封装，得到第四数据包，所述第四数据包不具有第一协议层头。
  63. 如权利要求61所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元，还用于：
    确定所述第一数据包的第一承载标识；其中，所述第一承载标识用于指示传输所述第一数据包所使用的第一承载；
    所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中还包含所述第一承载标识。
  64. 如权利要求62所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第三数据包的第一协议层头中还包含第二承载标识，所述第二承载标识用于指示传输所述第三数据包所使用的第二承载。
  65. 一种通信装置，应用于远端终端中，其特征在于，包括：
    通信单元，用于接收和发送数据；
    处理单元，用于：
    获取第一数据包；
    确定所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息、目标设备标识，所述第一数据包的第一路 由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；所述目标设备标识为所述远端终端的设备标识；
    为所述第一数据包添加第一协议层头，生成第二数据包；其中，所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中包含所述第一路由指示信息、所述第一目标设备标识；
    通过所述通信单元向中继终端发送所述第二数据包。
  66. 如权利要求65所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元还用于：
    通过所述通信单元接收来自所述中继终端的第三数据包，其中，所述第三数据包具有第一协议层头，所述第三数据包的第一协议层头中包含第二路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；所述第二路由指示信息用于指示所述第二数据包的传输路由；
    对所述第三数据包进行解封装，得到第四数据包，所述第四数据包不具有第一协议层头。
  67. 如权利要求65所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元还用于：
    确定所述第一数据包的第一承载标识；其中，所述第一承载标识用于指示传输所述第一数据包所使用的第一承载；
    所述第二数据包的第一协议层头中还包含所述第一承载标识。
  68. 如权利要求66所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第三数据包的第一协议层头中还包含第二承载标识，所述第二承载标识用于指示传输所述第三数据包所使用的第二承载。
  69. 如权利要求65-68任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元，在确定所述第一数据包的第一路由指示信息时，具体用于：
    确定所述第一路由指示信息为保存的所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息。
  70. 如权利要求69所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元还用于：
    通过所述通信单元从接入网设备或所述中继终端接收使所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息，所述第一远端终端对应的路由指示信息为所述第一远端终端的专用路由指示信息，或者默认的路由指示信息。
  71. 一种通信装置，应用于第一中继终端中，其特征在于，包括：
    通信单元，用于接收和发送数据；
    处理单元，用于：
    通过所述通信单元接收第一数据包，其中，所述第一数据包中具有第一协议层头，所述第一协议层头中包含第一路由指示信息和目标设备标识，所述第一路由指示信息用于指示所述第一数据包的传输路由；所述目标设备标识所指示的目标设备为所述第一数据包的目的设备或源设备；
    从所述第一数据包中获取所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识；
    根据所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，确定第一设备；
    通过所述通信单元向所述第一设备传输所述第一数据包。
  72. 如权利要求71所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一路由指示信息包含目标节点地址；所述处理单元，在根据所述第一路由指示信息和所述目标设备标识，确定所述第一设备时，具体用于：
    当所述目标节点地址与所述第一中继终端的地址相同时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备；或者
    当所述目标节点地址与所述第一中继终端的地址相同，且所述第一中继终端为连接接 入网设备的第一个中继终端时，所述第一中继终端确定接收所述第一数据包所使用的接口；当所述接口为Uu接口时，确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备；当所述接口为PC5接口时，确定所述第一设备为所述接入网设备。
  73. 如权利要求72所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一路由指示信息还包含目标路径标识。
  74. 如权利要求72或73所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元，在确定所述目标设备标识所指示的设备为所述第一设备时，具体用于：
    当所述目标设备标识指示接入所述第一中继终端的第一远端终端时，确定所述第一设备为所述第一远端终端。
  75. 如权利要求74所述的装置，其特征在于，所述处理单元，还用于当所述目标设备标识指示所述第一中继终端时，确定所述第一数据包中承载的数据为所述第一中继终端的数据。
  76. 如权利要求75所述的装置，其特征在于，当所述目标设备标识为默认设备标识时，所述目标设备标识指示所述第一中继终端。
  77. 如权利要求71-76任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述目标设备标识为所述目标设备的本地标识local ID。
  78. 如权利要求71-77任一项所述的装置，其特征在于，所述第一数据包的第一协议层头中还包含承载标识；所述承载标识用于指示传输所述第一数据包所使用的第一承载。
  79. 一种通信设备，其特征在于，包括：
    收发器，用于接收和发送数据；
    处理器，用于通过所述收发器，实现权利要求1-39任一项所述的方法。
  80. 一种通信系统，其特征在于，包括：
    第一中继终端，用于实现权利要求1-21任一项所述的方法；
    接入网设备，用于实现权利要求22-25任一项所述的方法。
  81. 如权利要求80所述的通信系统，其特征在于，所述通信系统还包括：
    远端终端，用于实现权利要求26-31任一项所述的方法。
  82. 一种通信系统，其特征在于，包括：
    远端终端，用于实现权利要求26-31任一项所述的方法；
    第一中继终端，用于实现权利要求32-39任一项所述的方法；
    接入网设备，用于实现权利要求22-25任一项所述的方法。
  83. 一种计算机可读存储介质，其特征在于，所述计算机可读存储介质中存储有计算机程序，当所述计算机程序在计算机上运行时，使得计算机执行权利要求1-39任一项所述的方法。
  84. 一种计算机程序产品，其特征在于，当所述计算机程序产品在计算机上运行时，使得所述计算机执行权利要求1-39任一项所述的方法。
  85. 一种芯片，其特征在于，所述芯片与存储器耦合，所述芯片读取存储器中存储的计算机程序，执行权利要求1-39任一项所述的方法。
PCT/CN2020/122531 2020-10-21 2020-10-21 一种路由方法及装置 WO2022082513A1 (zh)

Priority Applications (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/122531 WO2022082513A1 (zh) 2020-10-21 2020-10-21 一种路由方法及装置
CN202080106170.1A CN116325834A (zh) 2020-10-21 2020-10-21 一种路由方法及装置
EP20958096.8A EP4224900A4 (en) 2020-10-21 2020-10-21 ROUTING METHOD AND APPARATUS
US18/303,030 US20230262577A1 (en) 2020-10-21 2023-04-19 Routing method and apparatus

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
PCT/CN2020/122531 WO2022082513A1 (zh) 2020-10-21 2020-10-21 一种路由方法及装置

Related Child Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
US18/303,030 Continuation US20230262577A1 (en) 2020-10-21 2023-04-19 Routing method and apparatus

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2022082513A1 true WO2022082513A1 (zh) 2022-04-28

Family

ID=81291403

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/CN2020/122531 WO2022082513A1 (zh) 2020-10-21 2020-10-21 一种路由方法及装置

Country Status (4)

Country Link
US (1) US20230262577A1 (zh)
EP (1) EP4224900A4 (zh)
CN (1) CN116325834A (zh)
WO (1) WO2022082513A1 (zh)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024011546A1 (zh) * 2022-07-14 2024-01-18 北京小米移动软件有限公司 数据传输配置方法和装置

Families Citing this family (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20220263605A1 (en) * 2021-02-18 2022-08-18 Qualcomm Incorporated Harq procedure for cooperative relay in sidelink networks

Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20180152353A1 (en) * 2015-05-29 2018-05-31 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Transmission control of a multi-hop relay radio
CN110351700A (zh) * 2018-04-05 2019-10-18 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种自接入回传链路的中继转发方法及节点
CN110636643A (zh) * 2018-06-21 2019-12-31 中兴通讯股份有限公司 数据包的发送、接收方法及装置和数据包的传输系统

Family Cites Families (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
CN108307536B (zh) * 2016-08-11 2023-04-25 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种路由方法和设备
CN108809897A (zh) * 2017-04-28 2018-11-13 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种中继发现及中继转发方法、设备和存储介质

Patent Citations (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20180152353A1 (en) * 2015-05-29 2018-05-31 Telefonaktiebolaget Lm Ericsson (Publ) Transmission control of a multi-hop relay radio
CN110351700A (zh) * 2018-04-05 2019-10-18 中兴通讯股份有限公司 一种自接入回传链路的中继转发方法及节点
CN110636643A (zh) * 2018-06-21 2019-12-31 中兴通讯股份有限公司 数据包的发送、接收方法及装置和数据包的传输系统

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
ONLINE: "3GPP TSG-RAN WG2 Meeting #111 electronic R2-20nnnnn Title: [AT111-e][605][Relay] L2 Relay Mechanism (MediaTek) Document for: Discussion and decision", MEDIATEK INCRAPPORTEUR, 28 August 2020 (2020-08-28), pages 1 - 43, XP055869222, Retrieved from the Internet <URL:https://www.3gpp.org/ftp/tsg_ran/WG2_RL2/TSGR2_111-e/Inbox/Drafts/[Offline-605][Relay]%20L2%20relay%20mechanism/DRAFT%20R2-20nnnnn%20[AT111-e][605][Relay]%20L2%20Relay%20Mechanism%20(MediaTek)_v18(IDC).docx> [retrieved on 20211203] *

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
WO2024011546A1 (zh) * 2022-07-14 2024-01-18 北京小米移动软件有限公司 数据传输配置方法和装置

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
CN116325834A (zh) 2023-06-23
US20230262577A1 (en) 2023-08-17
EP4224900A4 (en) 2023-11-01
EP4224900A1 (en) 2023-08-09

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
EP4106410A1 (en) Sidelink relay communication method and apparatus, device and medium
US20210368417A1 (en) Communication method and apparatus
CN108307528B (zh) 一种信息传输方法、装置及系统
US7881276B2 (en) System and method for relaying data
JP7405858B2 (ja) マッピング方法、ノード、通信装置、及び記憶媒体
WO2020164596A1 (zh) 一种数据传输方法及装置
CN111865802B (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
US11805521B2 (en) Bearer mapping method for wireless backhaul node, wireless backhaul node and donor base station
US20230262577A1 (en) Routing method and apparatus
CN108366355B (zh) 数据发送方法、数据发送终端以及基站
WO2022082754A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
CN111586886A (zh) 一种无线回传链路的控制方法及装置
CN111194051A (zh) 传输路径的配置方法及装置
WO2021190504A1 (en) Methods, apparatuses and computer-readable medium for device-to-device communication
WO2023001307A1 (zh) 旁链路通信方法及设备
WO2018223824A1 (zh) 一种业务数据传输方法及装置
CN113973399A (zh) 报文转发方法、装置及系统
CN115699816A (zh) 用于在双连接下进行侧行链路中继通信的方法
WO2022257811A1 (zh) 数据传输方法、装置和存储介质
KR102488700B1 (ko) 단말 릴레이 지원 방법 및 장치
WO2022047654A1 (zh) 一种通信方法及装置
WO2020216083A1 (zh) 一种通信方法、通信装置及终端设备
WO2021169309A1 (zh) 通信方法、装置及系统
CN114424621A (zh) 一种缓冲区状态报告传输方法及装置
WO2022120653A1 (zh) 一种路由方法、装置以及系统

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 20958096

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1

ENP Entry into the national phase

Ref document number: 2020958096

Country of ref document: EP

Effective date: 20230504

NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE